1993 Specifications CSJ 0167-01-078

SPECIAL SPECIFICATION

ITEM 6873

Traffic Management Center

1.0 Description

This item shall govern for the construction of the El Paso Traffic
Management Center and Maintenance Support buildings as shown on the
plans, as detailed in this special specification and as directed by the
Engineer.

2.0 Materials

2.1 General Requirements All materials furnished, assembled or

installed under this item shall be new, corrosion resistant and in
strict accordance with the details shown on the plans and in the
specifications.

All equipment and materials shall be approved by the Engineer prior to

construction of the building unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer. In addition, all work performed shall also comply with the
minimal requirements as follows:

Bellcore Technical Requirements

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
National Electrical Code (NEC)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA)
American Society for testing Materials (ASTM)
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
American Society of Heating & Refrigeration (ASHRAE)
American Disabilities Act (ADA)
American Institute of Architects (AIA), Document A201,
1987 Edition

The contractor shall be required to have personnel experienced and

expert in the construction of the type of buildings proposed available
during the entire period of construction. The contractor shall comply
with the requirement either by engaging a consulting firm or supplying
the expertise through his own firm. In either case, he shall submit, in
writing, satisfactory evidence to the Engineer that the expertise is
available and will be used.

Materials shall conform to the appropriate standard specification items.

Any acceptable materials used which are not covered by the standard
specification shall conform to published and proven requirements for
those materials. Testing requirements comparable with these required
by the standard specifications will be required. Any unusual testing
required, in the Engineer's judgement, to insure the adequacy of the
material, shall be done at the expense of the contractor. Contractor
shall submit all operating and maintenance data, warranties and record
drawings.

1-199 6873
5-97
2.2 Functional Requirements
Following paragraphs supplement and supersede parts of General
Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987
Edition

2.2.1 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

A BASIC DEFINITIONS

1 ALTERNATE BID: Modification of Base Bid for variation in

Contract requirements. If Alternate accepted by Owner, variation
becomes Contract and modified amount determines Contract Sum

2 BASE BID: The bid without Alternate bids

3 DRAWINGS: Part of Contract Documents graphically showing

extent, size, location, number and relationship of product and
installation

4 EQUAL, APPROVED EQUAL, ARCHITECT APPROVED, ACCEPTABLE, APPROVED,

REQUIRED, DIRECTED, INSTRUCTED, SELECTED: Decisions and
interpretations by Architect

5 GENERAL CONTRACTOR, PRIME CONTRACTOR: Same as Contractor

6 OWNER: Same as TxDOT

7 NOT IN CONTRACT, NIC: Work not included in Contract

8 OCCURRENCE: (Defined here for Insurance) An event which occurs

during the policy period, or a continuous or repeated exposure to
condition which results, during the policy period, in bodily
injury, sickness or disease, or injury to, or destruction of
property, excluding injuries intentionally caused by the insured.
Any number of bodily injuries, or deaths, or cases of sickness,
or disease, or injuries to, or destruction of property of one or
more persons or organizations, including the loss of use thereof,
resulting from a common cause, or from exposure to substantially
the same general condition existing at, or emanating from each
location shall be deemed to result from one occurrence

9 OTHER CONTRACT: All references to "Other Contract" pertain to

the installation of a computerized transportation management
system. The requirements of this specification and all other
specifications under project CM 96(767) are bound under the same
contract.

10 SPECIFICATIONS: Part of Contract Documents in written

description of Work, separate or on Drawings

11 MEANING: Technical term not defined in Contract Documents has

meaning given in AIA Document 2M101 Glossary or Construction
Industry Terms, 1982 Edition

12 WORK: Includes everything shown, mentioned or reasonably

inferable as necessary to produce intended result. Omission
marked Not in Contract, by others, by Owner, future or existing

13 WORKING DAY: Calendar day except Saturday, Sunday and holiday

legal locally

2-199 6873
5-97
B EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT

1 RELATION OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

a. Equal authority and priority. If they disagree in themselves
or with each other, bid most expensive combination of quality
and quantity of Work. Appropriate Work determined by
Architect
b. Figures govern scaled measure
c. Larger scale detail governs smaller scale detail
d. Architectural Drawings take precedence for dimension if in
conflict with Mechanical and Structural Drawings, except size
of structural member
e. Specifically titled Drawings and Specification Sections
govern less formal indication of item
f. Existing condition takes precedence over Drawings and
Specifications for dimension, number and disposition

2 CODE, LAW, ORDINANCE, RULE, REGULATION: Requirement of public

authority applies as minimum requirement only. Contract
Documents govern if more stringent. Requirement in effect at
issuance governs. If Contract changed because of public
authority, adjust Contract Sum

3 TERMINOLOGY: Title, Specification, description do not reference

each detail, appurtenance or accessory. Include supportive Work

4 SPECIFIED WORK: If multiple requirement comply with each

5 OPTIONAL MATERIAL, BRAND AND PROCESS: If more than one

specified, Contractor's choice. Architect's selection of color
and pattern from range within Contractor's option

6 REFERENCE: Terms like "as shown", "as indicated", "as noted"

mean additional requirement elsewhere in Contract Documents

2.2.2 ARTICLE 2 - OWNER

A OWNER RESERVES RIGHT TO

1 OCCUPY WORK or specified part of it whether or not Contract Time

has expired. Owner pays appropriate utility, insurance and other
expense caused by early occupancy

2 MAKE EMERGENCY REPAIR during warranty to prevent further damage.

Contractor pay for repair if necessitated by defect in his Work

3 MODIFY ALLOWANCE or eliminate from Contract

B OWNER DUTY

1 ISSUE NOTICE TO PROCEED (after receipt of signed Contract) for

Contractor to commence Work as soon as practicable after
effective date of Insurance

2 MAKE PROGRESS AND FINAL PAYMENT within stipulated time limit

C OWNER NOT REQUIRED TO ACCEPT (unless specifically agreed)

a. Partial Substantial Completion

b. Substantial Completion ahead of date established in Owner
Contractor Agreement
3-199 6873
5-97
2.2.3 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR

A CONTRACTOR CAPABILITY

Contractor represents and warrants by signed Agreement that he is

financially solvent, experienced in and competent to perform Work and to
furnish plant, material, supply and equipment necessary. He further
represents and warrants by signing Agreement. That he is familiar with
Federal, State, Municipal and County laws, ordinances, and regulations
which may affect Work or persons employed or related to Work

B CONTRACTOR DUTY

1 NOTIFY OWNER OF POTENTIAL DAMAGE CLAIM if Contractor knows claim

that might cause reduction below 75% of policy limits

2 PROPOSE SUBSTITUTION PROMPTLY (but only after signing Agreement,

unless item beyond Contractor's control): Submit proposal to
Architect in writing giving sufficient information and samples
for evaluation. Include difference in cost if any. Substitution
must be approved in writing before use. See quality control by
Contractor Section

3 USE PRODUCT AND MATERIAL

a. New unless specified used; high quality in either case
b. Suitable for function
c. Corresponding in quality to related Work if no further
specification
d. Of approved appearance where exposed to view
e. From one source for same purpose, with uniform appearance and
physical property
f. Material suitable for container delivered in original
unopened container, plainly marked

4 FOLLOW SUPPLIER'S INSTRUCTION: If in conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification before proceeding. Keep
manufacturer's instructions on job; make available to Owner and
Architect

5 PERFORM HIGH QUALITY PROFESSIONAL WORKMANSHIP

a. Finish to high standard of Trade
b. Join to uniform, accurate fit meeting in neat line; no smear
or gap
c. Install exposed material appropriately level, plumb, parallel
and at right angle to adjoining material
d. Use fastening stronger than materials joined

6 HALT WORK when notified of proposed Change, or if anticipate

unsatisfactory result. Proceed only after receiving additional
instruction

7 ESTABLISH AND MAINTAIN BENCH MARK and other grade, line and
level. Report error or inconsistency before commencing Work.
Confirm placement of construction after lines staked
8 ARRANGE TO ACCOMMODATE NIC WORK: If information inadequate,
request further instruction before proceeding

9 PROVIDE ACCESS for Owner, his representative, Architect and

governing inspector. Keep facility safe and reasonably
convenient
4-199 6873
5-97
 10 PREPARE QUOTATION for proposed change in Work as directed by
Architect. Quotation format "broken down" giving number of
units, unit cost of material, hours of labor, hourly cost of
labor, tool cost, overhead and profit. Show credit as well as
extra cost

C CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

1 DAMAGE TO PROJECT CONTENT during warranty, if damage result from

his negligent use of product, or use of faulty product

2 WARRANT THAT MODIFICATION HE SUGGESTS will give satisfactory

performance

3 WARRANT SUBSTITUTION equal or superior to product specified,

unless shortcoming specifically justified in substitution request

4 VERIFY AND COORDINATE EQUIPMENT size, number, roof opening,

location, base, foundation, anchor bolt, utility connection and
other equipment accommodation. Size and location on Drawings
approximate

5 MAINTAIN SITE in condition to perform Work

D SAMPLE SIZE

Large or whole unit only if noted. Show quality, variation to approval

E ALLOWANCE

Adjust for overhead and profit only if changed by more than 25%

2.2.4 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT

A AUTHORITY, ROLE

1 PRESENCE of Architect or Owner does not imply concurrence or

approval. If in doubt, Contractor ask Architect's or Owner's
opinion

2 OWNER administer separate contract

3 OWNER assume function of Architect for Administration of Contract

B ARBITRATION (Mediation before Arbitration recommended)

1 IN CONTRACT: Per local or nearest authority

2.2.5 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGE IN WORK

A COST BALANCE WITHIN CHANGE

When added and deducted in same negotiation, "Change" limited to net

difference; same Cost for added and deducted Work

B RELOCATION

Not considered Change in Work if not involving Cost

5-199 6873
5-97
C OVERHEAD DEFINITION

1 Incidental expense not specified as Cost in General Conditions

2 Small tool max /500

3 Include following as overhead unless Contractor has metering and

record keeping to accurately record Cost directly attributable to
Change
a. Wage of supervisor, foreman, timekeeper, clerk, other
b. Temporary facility
c. Field and office general

D MARKUP

Use following markup for overhead and profit in addition to accounting

of Cost due to Change in Work
a. Markup by Contractor or subcontractor actually performing Change
in Work: Not over 20% of his Cost
b. Markup by Contractor on Change in Work by subcontractor not over
$50 if Cost 0 thru $1000; not over 5% of Cost above $1000
c. When sub subcontractor performs Change in Work, 20% markup used
only by him. Markup by Contractor and subcontractor each not over
$50 if Cost 0 thru $1000; not over 5% of Cost above $1000
d. If Change in Work result in saving to Owner, total overhead
charge limited to $50 or 5%, whichever is greater. Include no
profit

2.2.6 ARTICLE 8 - TIME

TIME EXTENSION

1 NO EXTENSION ALLOWED
a. If at least 7 hours of working day
b. For Saturday, Sunday or Holiday unless Contract require
overtime
c. For drying of material when possible to enclose and use
drying devices

2 APPROVED EXTENSION OF TIME Compensated by adding equal number of

Working Days to Contract Time

3 EXTENSION PROCEDURE Claim delay by telephone on first day of

delay. Confirm in writing with monthly application for payment
or in 15 days

4 INCLEMENT WEATHER Any delay cause by inclement weather allowable

for extension to Contract Time, subject to above limitation

2.2.7 ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

LIMITS OF NONCONFORMING WORK

1 EXTENT AND EXPENSE Correct entire extent of nonconforming Work

including affected adjacent, unless limited correction
satisfactory to Architect. Additional testing, sampling or
inspection to define nonconforming Work at Contractor's expense.
Employ Owner's independent testing laboratory or mutually
satisfactory independent testing LABORATORY IF LABORATORY SERVICE
REQUIRED. CORRECTED WORK retested at Contractor's expense
6-199 6873
5-97
 2 TIME Note 2 year Warranty requirement in Section

2.2.8 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

FEDERAL BANKRUPTCY ACT

Termination of Contract by Owner on basis of appropriate legal review

only

3.0 Specifications

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 Abstract of Work

A DESCRIPTION

The Work, as defined in General Conditions and described in Contract

Documents, summarized:

One story new building renovation using metal building frame and
concrete slab. Two story new building steel frame on concrete slab and
foundation, builtup roof, plaster on CMU walls, fixed aluminum windows
and hollow metal doors. One story new building to receive double
pitched metal roof and masonry wall with upward acting doors. Interior
finish of both buildings typical

B RELATED WORK IN OTHER CONTRACT

a. Back projection
b. Screen
c. Monitors
d. Loose furniture
e. Work bench
f. As noted under Mechanical and Electrical

C BY OWNER (free to Contractor)

a. Contract Documents for construction; limited to 15

b. Testing laboratory service
c. Application and payment for permanent water and sewer connection
d. Owner's sign
e. Computer; coordinate with Contractor

D INSTALLATION OF ALLOWANCE PRODUCT DELIVERED (and product by Owner)

Provide installation and accessory unless directed otherwise

E ALLOWANCE

Include in Bid Amount and Contract Sum without markup. Supplier and
product as selected

1 PRODUCT DELIVERED
a. Carpet gluedown $20/sq ft

2 PRODUCT AND INSTALLATION

Graphic

7-199 6873
5-97
F ALTERNATE: Refer to remainder of Contract Documents for application
and extent. Strike out ADD or DEDUCT for each Alternate

ALTERNATE1 ADD DEDUCT

$
Brief Description: Natural stone in lieu of cast stone

3.1.2 Contract Closeout

A Copies of referenced AIA Documents are on file in Architect's office

and may be reviewed on request. Copies may be purchased from
American Institute of Architects chapter or local professional
outlet like "blueprinting"

B SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

1 When Project or specified part of Project reaches Substantial

Completion as defined in General and Supplementary Conditions send
written notice to Architect, along with written list of items to be
completed or corrected

2 Architect then inspect to determine completion, and verify or

supplement list of outstanding items

3 If Architect does to concur in Contractor's claim of Substantial

Completion he will notify Contractor. Contractor send second notice
at appropriate time

4 When Architect determines Work substantially complete, Architect

prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion to establish Date of
Substantial Completion, state responsibilities of Owner and
Contractor for maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance; and fix
time for Contractor to complete listed items. Architect submit
Certificate of Substantial Completion to Owner and Contractor for
their written acceptance of assigned responsibility

5 Owner may occupy Project or specified part of Project as stipulated

in AIA Document G704, Contractor complete listed items of Work
within time fixed by Architect

C WARRANTY, INSTRUCTION, SCHEDULE

1 Instruct Owner's Representative in operation of mechanical,

electrical and other system

2 Deliver keys at one time to Owner with keying schedule, master,

submaster and special key. Obtain receipt

3 Deliver to Architect written warranty prepared in duplicate,

certificate of inspection and bond for his review and delivery to
Owner

4 Deliver to Architect operating, servicing, maintenance and cleaning

instruction for Work; part list and special tool for mechanical and
electrical Work

5 Deliver Record Drawings to Architect

8-199 6873
5-97
D FINAL INSPECTION

Notify Architect in writing when Project complete and requirements met.

Architect make final inspection

E RELEASE OF RETAINAGE

Deliver to Owner prior to or with request for release

a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA

Document G706
b. Contractor's Affidavit of Release, AIA Document G706A
c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707
d. Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of
Retainage, AIA Document G707A (if applicable)

F FINAL PAYMENT

1 Submit final Application for Payment after stipulated time

indicating adjustment of account; include original
Contract Sum, addition and deduction from Change Order,
Allowance, deduction for uncorrected Work, deduction
for liquidated damages and other requirement of
Contract Documents

2 Architect issue final Certificate for Payment upon his approval of

final application

G CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION (Occupancy Permit)

Owner secure as required

3.1.3 Format 1F

A DRAWINGS

Identified in Agreement. Drawings can be schematic and

not define exact characteristic of every part. Item as
selected could vary from item called out in Contract
Documents. Determine exact position of each item by on
the job measurement and recommendation by supplier.
Coordinate with other Work

B SPECIFICATIONS IDIOM

1 Goal is to be clear and fair. Mode is simple imperative, equally

binding, rather than the old indicative mood/passive voice like "The
Contractor shall...the Owner will..." To focus and highlight, form
is brief subject/predicate, with heading and listing

2 Omission of "the", "an", "all", to-be verbs and so on is for concise

written communication. Conversational words and phrases presumed,
as for Drawing notes. Singular used where generic; capital for AIA
and Contract term. Period omitted at paragraph ending and after
abbreviation

C SPECIFICATION SECTION

1 EACH SECTION governs complete Work of its title, along with Work
related to its title, wherever Work is shown on Drawings or
mentioned in Specifications
9-199 6873
5-97
 2 WITHIN ARCHITECTURAL TECHNICAL SECTIONS (in Divisions numbered 2
thru 14)
Articles are numbered
1 for General
2 for Products
3 for Execution
4 for Schedules and trade subsystems.
Not all of these Parts need appear in Section

3 SECTIONS COMBINED AS SYSTEM

See General Articles in Sections for unified responsibility

D ARCHITECT'S AUTHORITY

If Specifications like "equal", "to approval", "approved in writing",

"as selected", "submittal", "as directed" or similar words and phrases
occur they call for decision by Architect. For example, a spelled out
phrase would be "as selected by Architect"

3.1.4 General Stipulation 1GS

A SALES TAX

Owner qualifies as exempt from Texas sales tax. Account per state
comptrollers guidelines

B CONTRACT TIME

Stipulated by Contractor in his bid

C USE OF SITE

a. Coordinate with Owner's operation for minimal mutual

inconvenience
b. Shut down building service and perform hazardous Work during low
occupancy or when site unoccupied by Owner
c. Coordinate access, storage and parking
d. See Drawings for limit of construction site use

D MOVING OF OWNER'S POSSESSION

By Owner unless otherwise indicated

E PREVAILING WAGE RATE

As specified by public body awarding Contract

F SIGNAGE

No advertising onsite. Contractor's name and other information on

project sign

G MATCH EXISTING

a. Match existing line, level, surface, material, texture, color

and general appearance of existing Work unless indicated otherwise
b. Device, construction, product and Work compatible with existing
conditions

10-199 6873
5-97
H STREET CLOSING (if necessary)

Arrange to temporarily close street and divert traffic. Coordinate to

satisfaction of Owner

I ADJACENT PROPERTY AND PUBLIC DOMAIN

Do not use for access, storage, construction or other purpose without

written approval of proper authority and owner

J MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK

Concrete work and grout, including items for various Sections, part of
Division 3. Verify unusual or extensive requirement with subcontractor
prior to bidding

K REPLACEMENT MATERIAL (for Owners future use)

Request instruction before discarding surplus

L SEPARATE CONTRACTOR

a. Each contractor provide temporary facility for his work

b. Cooperate with other contractor
c. Administration by Owner

M SALVAGE

Do not sell on Owner's property

N RECORD DRAWINGS

Mark changes in colored pencil on set of record prints supplied by

Architect free to Contractor. Show a. Buried utility line change
b. Structural member change
c. Major Change Order

O TEMPORARY UTILITY (For Construction and Testing)

Arrange and provide connection; pay utility charge

P COORDINATION OF PERMANENT UTILITY CONNECTION

Connect promptly after Owner pays fee and deposit

Q DEMOLITION SEQUENCE

Submit for approval

R RETAINAGE (10%)

Pay interest per HB 1815 by 67th Texas Legislature; account per State
Comptroller's guidelines

S OVERTIME

If required by Owner, Contract adjusted

11-199 6873
5-97
T ARCHITECT'S AUTHORITY

Architect's decision final for Work appearance, approval, selection,

quality

U CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

Control Work shown, mentioned, inferred. Enforce safety and order.

Assure compliance with code, ordinance and governing authority

V START OF CONSTRUCTION

Commence no Work at Site until insurance and bonds accepted by Owner and
he has issued Work Order

3.1.5 Handling of Product, Material, Equipment 1H

1A TRANSPORT

Arrange timely per Work schedule, site condition and coordination

1B DELIVERY

a. VERIFY: Shipment complete and undamaged; or arrange restitution

b. PACKAGING: Original and intact container. Pallet for masonry.
Seal flat pallet for door, panel and other plane, warpable product
c. IDENTIFICATION: Marking intact and legible

1C STORAGE

a. Per instruction by supplier/manufacturer

b. Marking visible
c. Weathertight if weather vulnerable
d. Fabricated product raised on blocking or skidding
e. Granular material on solid well drained base

1D PROTECTION

a. Prevent wetting, staining, soiling, contamination

b. Cover and ventilate as needed
c. Ambient condition per recommendation by supplier/manufacturer

2A PRODUCT

a. Per Contract Conditions and Technical Sections

b. Quality control decision by Architect
c. Contractor responsible for testing in field, cooperation with
laboratory testing, submittal, information for substitution; under
quality control by Contractor Section

3A EXECUTION

Verify condition, install, connect, clean adjust per instruction by

supplier/manufacturer unless specified otherwise. If specified
otherwise, ask clarification from Architect before proceeding. Keep
copy of instruction and clarification onsite

12-199 6873
5-97
3.1.6 Laboratory Testing 1LT

A GENERAL

a. Independent testing laboratory selected by Owner to test

conformance with Contract Documents
b. Owner does not guarantee test result, but result accepted as
measure of Contract conformance
c. Contractor may not hire same testing laboratory as Owner

B PAYMENT FOR SERVICE

1 INITIAL TEST: By Owner to laboratory

2 RETESTING, TESTING FOR EXTENT OF NONCONFORMANCE, COST OF CONTRACTOR

CAUSED TEST DELAY: By Contractor to laboratory

C QUALIFICATION

1 LABORATORY (ASTM E 329)

a. Submit copy of latest inspection by National Bureau of
Standards, with certification of remedy for any deficiency
b. Facility for test included in this Section

2 TESTING MACHINE: Calibrate to max one year by NBS

D LAB AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY

a. Laboratory not authorized to change Contract requirement, nor to

approve or accept Work. If Work seem deficient, laboratory
promptly notify Architect, Contractor or Owner

b. Promptly issue copy of laboratory report to Architect,

Contractor and Owner

E EXTENT OF SERVICE

All work mentioned herein may not be required. Refer to Contract

Documents for applicability and extent. Owner may perform other test

F STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

a. AGGREGATE TEST: ASTM C 33

b. MIX DESIGN: Proportion, w/c ratio, slump per ACI 211.1, 318 and
613
c. SLUMP TEST: At beginning of each pour, also if water adjustment
or noticeable change of slump per ASTM C 143
d. SAMPLE: 4 standard test cylinders per ASTM C 172 for each 50
cubic yards or fraction. Make 4 extra test cylinders if noticeable
slump change
e. TESTING: Cure cylinder per ASTM C 192. Test 2 cylinders at 7
days and 2 at 28 days per ASTM C 39. Report each separately

G SOIL

1 ANALYSIS METHOD
a. Liquid limit
b. Plastic limit
c. Plasticity index
d. Maximum density

13-199 6873
5-97
 2 MINIMUM LAB TEST: Each soil type under structure or paving

3 FIELD DENSITY TEST: Min 3 each 10,000 sq ft, each lift, each soil
type

H BUILTUP ROOF

a. SAMPLE: Before flood coat cut 4x36" strip across plies

b. TEST METHOD: Weigh bitumen not part of felt
c. EXAMINATION: Ply number and weight; coverage between plies
d. NUMBER OF TESTS: 2 plus one for each 500 squares or fraction

I ROOF TOPPING

1 TYPE
a. FIELD: Wet density
b. LAB: Dry density and 28 day compressive strength

2 NUMBER: Min one each days Work or 5000 sq ft

J ASPHALT PAVEMENT

1 SUBGRADE
a. TYPE: Liquid limit; plasticity index
b. NUMBER: One each soil type

2 ASPHALT PAVING: Stability test each type

3 SIEVE ANALYSIS: One each base course type

4 FIELD DENSITY TEST

a. LOCATION: Subgrade, base course, topping
b. NUMBER: One each 1000 sq yd or fraction

5 OBSERVION: Report mix of base and topping at plant

K STEEL ERECTION

a. GENERAL: Field inspect bolt, rivet, weld for Contract

conformity
b. WELD INSPECTION: Code D1.1 by American Welding Society; include
inspection of full penetration weld at frequency noted in Drawings.
Inspect welder credential per AWS. Verify electrode type and size

L CONCRETE MASONRY

a. STANDARD: TEK 130 by NCMA

b. SAMPLE: 6 units randomly selected
c. CONTROL BY LAB: Plastic wrap immediately; mark each unit

3.1.7 Mechanical and Electrical Stipulation 1ME

A COORDINATION

Coordinate Work. Provide offset or other fitting necessary to avoid

interference. Offset pressure piping and conduit rather than ductwork,
conduit rather than pressure piping, small line rather than large;
offset other Work rather than gravity piping. Determine before purchase
if product plus access and servicing fit in space provided

B GENERAL REQUIREMENT (See Division 15 and 16 for detail)

14-199 6873
5-97
 1 SUBMITTAL
Shop drawing, product data, Owner's manual, installation
recommendation and instruction. Sample if requested by Architect,
usable in Work

2 DRAWINGS
Diagrammatic; indication of location approximate unless exactly
dimensioned. Final location determined by field measure, structural
and architectural requirement. Special equipment layout, and if in
doubt by Architect

3 LABEL
Per Specification and requirement of governing body; bear
Certification by ARI, NSF, NFPA and UL

4 SUPPORT, SLEEVE
Preset insert in concrete; coordinate insert in framing and masonry

5 NOISE AND VIBRATION

Keep below objectionable level

C PENETRATION AND MODIFICATION OF OTHER WORK

a. Coordinate or restore; fit conforming trim; to approval

b. Provide interim waterproof cover for exterior cut

D TEST AND DEMONSTRATION

Min 7 days prior notice to Architect (Engineer may require other notice)

E ACCESS DOOR

Locate to provide maintenance and adjustment for concealed Work.

Governed by access door Section

3.1.8 Progress Photographs 1PP

1A CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

Arrange for and pay experienced professional photographer

2A PHOTOGRAPHS

a. FREQUENCY: Once per month of Work until Substantial Completion

b. QUANTITY: Each submission 2 sets of 8x10" glossy color prints
c. MOUNTING: On stiff backing for approved filing
d. TRANSMIT: To Architect for Owner

3A EXECUTION

a. CAMERA STATION, VIEW: Three; unchanged throughout Work

b. ENVELOPE: Standard photographic marked "Do not bend"
c. IDENTIFY: Each print by Project, date and description
d. NEGATIVES: Property of Owner, who reserves all rights

4A SCHEDULE

Coordinate with Architect and Owner

3.1.8 Quality Control By Contractor 1 QC

15-199 6873
5-97
A CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

Testing approval or approval by Architect does not relieve Contractor of

responsibility for Contract conformance

B COOPERATE WITH TESTING

1 LABORATORY TESTING
a. Provide sample of proposed material that requires testing.
Deliver to laboratory or as directed
b. Furnish casual labor and facility to handle site material sample
and expedite inspection and test c. Advise laboratory of schedule
early enough to allow assignment of personnel and completion of test
d. Provide and maintain, for laboratory use only, safe storage and
proper curing of specimen which must remain onsite until testing
e. Copy of each test report to Architect, Owner and other Contract
party

2 TEST, INSPECTION BY PUBLIC AUTHORITY

Min 3 days prior notice to Architect

C MOCKUP (for testing)

Per Drawings and Technical Section

D SHOP DRAWINGS

1 DEFINITION
Term includes fabrication drawing, erection drawing, cutting and
setting drawing, brochure and product data describing material and
equipment, operational and maintenance data. Include recommended
attachment and layout if different from or not on Drawings

2 FORMAT
a. SHEET SIZE: Min 8-1/2x11"; max 42x30" (unless full size)
b. IDENTIFICATION: Include Project name and number, supplier's
name and date; leave space for review stamping

3 CONTENT
a. Member size and gage
b. Anchoring and securing whole and part
c. Quantity and location of each item
d. Other date needed to show Work and location
e. Material and finish
f. How item members adjacent Work
g. Required connection
h. Overall size and weight
I. Clearance and tolerance

4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
a. CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL (required before submittal to Architect):
Check shop drawings; correct and add field measurement if needed.
Stamp, date and sign; submit with transmittal
b. DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Point out in transmittal
c. SHOP DRAWING: 2 blackline and 2 sepia. One marked sepia
returned
d. BROCHURE, CATALOG CUT (first run print): 3 each

16-199 6873
5-97
 5 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
a. Do not start fabrication until sepia (and first run print)
returned marked by Architect
b. Shop Drawings will be checked for design. Architect approval
does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviation from
Contract Documents and coordination of Work

E SAMPLE

1 REQUIRED FOR
a. Specified item
b. Selection of color, texture, finish
c. Comparison for Work quality and appearance

2 SIZE: 12 inches square or 12 inches long unless otherwise noted

3 NUMBER: One set for selection. 2 samples of final choice

4 IDENTIFICATION: Same as Contract Documents

F PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION (after signing of Agreement)

1 EQUALITY (no change in price)

With application provide evidence in support of "or equal"
consideration. Substitute equal to or superior to specified
product for warranty, appearance, performance, compatibility and
other consideration

2 NON EQUALITY (cost saving to Owner or benefit to Project)

a. Inquire before providing formal application
b. If consideration accepted, provide relevant information and any
cost change in Change Order format. Assure compatibility with
adjacent; note any change required in other Work

3 EXPEDITE WORK (Contract time saving)

a. Provide timely application and complete information
b. Approval or rejection within 15 days after receipt of formal
application

4 APPROVAL
Do not proceed with substitution until approved in writing

3.1.10 Standard, Abbreviation 1 SA

A MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS

Product and execution specified by reference to specifications by

supplier, organization, industry, code, or other published standard;
comply with edition current at date of Contract Documents. Most
stringent requirement of referenced standard and Contract Document
governs Work

B CERTIFICATION

If requested, furnish sworn affidavit from supplier or manufacturer

certifying that product delivered to site meets Specifications

C STANDARD

Name of organization which may be referenced in Contract Documents

abbreviated as
17-199 6873
5-97
 AA Aluminum Association
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transport
Officials
ABC Associated Builders and Contractors
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
AHA American Hardboard Association
AIA American Institute of Architects
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron & Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
* ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA American Plywood Association
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASA American Subcontractors Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and
Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Material
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau
AWWA American Waterworks Association
AWS American Welding Society
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Institute of America
* BOCA Building Officials Conference of America
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standard
CSI Construction Specification Institute
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FDA Food and Drug Administration
FGMA Flat Glass Manufacturer's Association
FHA Federal Housing Administration
FHDA Fir & Hemlock Door Association
FS Federal Specifications
*** ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
MIL Military Specifications
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NRCA National Roofing Contractor’s Association
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturing Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
PS (Voluntary) Products Standard
**** SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International
SDHPT State Department of Highways and Public
Transportation
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SFPA Southern Forest Products Association
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
18-199 6873
5-97
 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TCA Tile Council of America
TPI Truss Plate Institute
UBC Uniform Building Code
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
USDA United States Department of Agriculture
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumber Association
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (or) Woven
Wire Products
Association

* Safety Code
** Basic Building Code
*** Uniform Building Code
**** Standard Building Code

D OTHER ABBREVIATION

A ampere
AC alternating current
adj adjustable
alum aluminum
avg average
BTU British Thermal Unit
C channel
cc cubic centimeter
cfm cubic feet per minute
cj construction joint
cm centimeter
CMU concrete masonry unit
cu cubic
d depth; penny (nail)
DB dry bulb
DC direct current
diag diagonal
diam diameter
dim dimension
ea each
ej expansion joint
F degrees Fahrenheit
fc foot candles
ft foot
fpm feet per minute
fps feet per second
g gram
gal gallon
galv galvanized
gpm gallons per minute
h, hi, ht high, height
hr hour
Hz hertz
I steel beam
ID inside diameter
IIC impact insulation class
jt joint
k kip
KD knockdown; kiln dried
ksf kips per square foot
ksi kips per squar linear length
19-199 6873
5-97
 lb pound
lin lineal
max maximum
MDO medium density overlay
MEP mechanical electrical plumbing
min minimum
mph miles per hour
NIC not in Contract
NRC noise reduction coefficient
OD outside diameter
oz ounce
phase; round
pcf pounds per cubic foot
plf pounds per lineal foot
pr pair
psf pound per square foot
psi pounds per square inch
PVC polyvinyl chloride
RH relative humidity
RO rough opening
sec second
S4S smooth 4 sides
sq square
ss stainless steel
STC sound transmission class
T&G tongue and groove
thk thickness
V volt
w width
W watt
WB wet bulb
WP waterproof
wt weight
WWM welded wire mesh
x by (for dimensioning)
y yield
yd yard

3.1.11 Temporary Facility 1TF

A APPLICABILITY

1 Contract governed by following outline of service and responsibility

unless Contractor notify subcontractor otherwise before his bid

2 Remove temporary facility from site at Substantial Completion

B SERVICE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR (free to subcontractor)

a. Pay utility bill

b. Pay for temporary water meter required
c. General fire protection, safety requirement
d. Access road
e. Onsite parking where available
f. Trash location or receptacle; trash removal from site
g. Ice water and disposable cup
h. Toilet
I. Storage space
j. Pumping building excavation
k. Centerline and bench mark
l. Layout of interior finish work
20-199 6873
5-97
 m. Telephone for local call
n. Final cleaning
o. Hoisting of normal size and weight item

C INDIVIDUAL SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY (relating to his own Work)

a. Hoisting abnormal size and weight item

b. Excessive utility requirement
c. Scaffolding
d. Special fire protection
e. Parking offsite if necessary
f. Daily collection of trash and debris
g. Removal of liquid waste
h. Pumping outside building, or required by his Work
i. Excessive electrical requirement
j. Protection of Work
k. Cleaning of his Work and area; trash to location/receptacle
l. Performance and payment bonds

D SERVICE PROVIDED UNDER PLUMBING

a. Water tap, meter application and installation

b. Hose bibb each floor
c. Pressure tank and pump if needed

E SERVICE PROVIDED UNDER ELECTRICAL

a. Temporary lighting and power

b. Wiring and control for construction water pump

F PROGRESS CLEANUP

1 TRASH REMOVAL
a. Clear site of trash at least once per week
b. If rapid accumulation, more frequent removal
c. Contain or remove combustible trash and garbage daily

2 DEBRIS DISPOSITION
a. Remove from site and dispose legally
b. No material buried or burned onsite
c. Prevent accidental burning; avoid large accumulation

3 RESPONSIBILITY: Each subcontractor responsible for progress cleanup

of his operation unless notified to contrary prior to bidding;
collect and deposit trash, garbage and debris for removal

G FINAL CLEANING

1 By General Contractor, without cost to subcontractor, per cleaner

supplier's instruction for each Project condition

2 a. Project in immaculate condition inside and out

b. Remove smudge, mark, stain, fingerprint, soil, dirt, paint,
spot, dust, lint, discoloration and other contamination c. Clean
finished surface inside and outside building

H FIELD OFFICE

Provide weathertight space as Project office available to subcontractor

and Architect. Provide light and heat as required. Remove from site
and when office can be set up in building
21-199 6873
5-97
3.2 SITE

3.2.1 Anterior and Auxiliary Sitework 2A

1A GENERAL

Examine Contract Documents and Site. Include preparation for Work and
protection of existing to remain, vegetation to remain and adjacent
property including public domain

1B OWNER PROVIDED DOCUMENT

Survey is included in Contract Documents whether bound in or separate.

Architect does not guarantee its content for accuracy, completeness or
suitability. It serves as basis of Contract for existing surface and
above surface conditions

SURVEY: Available from Owner.

Pertinent information on Drawings

3A LAYOUT OF WORK

Accurately stake out. If problem encountered request instruction

before proceeding

3B REMOVAL OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS AND DEBRIS (Do not burn or bury)

a. EXTENT: Examine Site and Drawings for Existing encumbrance,

interference with Work and material to be removed
b. TREE (not to be protected): Remove stump and root over 6" diam
to min 1-1/2 ft below finish grade and 1- 1/2 ft form foundation
concrete
c. DISPOSAL: Offsite, legal

3C TEMPORARY ROAD (all weather)

a. Restrict vehicle form unnecessary damage

b. Provide construction access. If use permanent paving, restore
to approval

3D DRAINAGE FOR CONSTRUCTION

Provide temporary grading, ditching, pumping, culvert, dewatering and

other facility needed for Work. Provide permanent storm drainage early
enough to facilitate Work

3.2.2 Bracing and Shoring 2BS

1A DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

Provide supplementary detail for review. If no exception in Agreement,

general design assumed adequate without extra cost. If requirement in
contradiction, promptly request clarification per Contract Conditions

1B EXISTING CONDITIONS

Verify information in Contract Documents as Work progresses. If

existing condition contradictory, notify per Contract Conditions
22-199 6873
5-97
2A PRODUCT

Governed by Divisions 3, 5 and 6

3A PROTECTION OF OTHER WORK

Arrange product and procedure to protect other work from disfigurement

and damage. Correct or pay for damage under this Section

3.2.3 Earthwork 2E

1A LABORATORY TESTING

See Division1

2A SELECT FILL MATERIAL

a. LIQUID LIMIT: 30 to 45
b. PLASTICITY INDEX: 10 to 18
c. LINEAR SHRINKAGE: 10% maximum
d. PURITY: No stone or debris larger than 3"; no organic

2B ORDINARY FILL MATERIAL

a. Free of high organic topsoil (usually in top 6" to 8" of grass

or weed growth)
b. From normally dry, well drained location
c. Free of trash, stone and debris that could interfere with
compaction or promote settlement
d. Of suitable moisture for compaction

3A TOPSOIL

a. REMOVAL: Required under walks, paving and concrete slab

b. DEPTH: About 6"
c. STOCKPILE: Onsite for grass area if needed. If not needed
remove from site

3B SELECT FILL INSTALLATION (under walk, paving and concrete slab)

1 TEST METHOD (at optimum moisture): ASTM D 1557 or AASHTO T 99 or

SDHPT Item 216 (same test, different names)

2 MINIMUM COMPACTION
a. COHESIVE SOIL: 95% max density
b. NONCOHESIVE SOIL: 95% max density

3 PLACEMENT: 8" loose layers and compact to 95% proctor dry density
at optimum moisture content

3C ORDINARY FILL INSTALLATION (unpaved area)

a. Saturate if rainfall inadequate

b. Grade for drainage
c. Allow for topsoil or finish grading

3D TRENCH SELECT FILL

1 COMPACTION Use following procedure for designated width

a. 12" OR LESS: No compaction by lifts required if fill is
23-199 6873
5-97
 granular or soft enough to compact readily by water saturation
b. 12" TO 36": Compact by water saturation to within 2 feet of
surface. Compact upper 2 feet in layers
c. OVER 36": Compact in layers starting at bottom
d. Trench backfill for water and sewer lines shall be as shown on
drawings

2 BACKFILL (and 12" outside each inlet): Stabilized sand mix; 2 sacks
portland cement per cu yd

3E FILL ON PUBLIC LAND

Per governing authority

4A SELECT FILL LOCATION

a. Building slab
b. Vehicle paving
c. Walk doweled to building slab
d. Trench for MEP requirement
e. Excavation backfill

4B UNKNOWN UTILITY

Ascertain ownership and usage; cap or remove and cap abandoned line

3.2.4 Excavation for Building 2 EB

1A REQUIREMENT IN OTHER SECTION

Earthwork Section govern this Work

1B FOOTING TOLERANCE

Location plus or minus 2" for spread footing

3A SEQUENCE

Place fill under slab on earth before excavating for footing and beam

3B FOUNDATION EXCAVATION

1 Pour footing after Architect inspects excavation. Place concrete

promptly before change

2 In absence of information concerning subsurface soil stiffness,

assume 45 degree angle of repose at optimum moisture. No angle of
repose can be assumed if soil not at optimum moisture. Use formwork
if concrete surface vertical or steeper than angle of repose

3 Cut neatly for footing, to bearing approved by Architect. Replace

wet or disturbed soil with fill concrete min 1000 psi at 28 days

4 Keep excavation shored and dewatered

3.2.5 Earth Investigation 2EI

A OWNER PROVIDED DOCUMENT

Subsurface Investigation is included in Project Manual only for

estimator and design convenience. Architect does not guarantee its
24-199 6873
5-97
content for accuracy, completeness or suitability. It provides
evidence of existing subsurface for design and bidding decision.
Drawings and Specifications govern Contract requirement unless otherwise
agreed

B BOUND IN

Copy of document follows

3.2.6 Finish Grading 2FG

2A TOPSOIL

1 DEFINITION: Soil suitable for growing grass with addition of

fertilizer and water. Sand acceptable if free from weed root and
seed

2 SOURCE: Use topsoil available from site; if insufficient bring in

topsoil

3 THICKNESS: Provide 3" compacted min thickness

3A WORKMANSHIP

1 COMPACTION: If no rainfall occurs sprinkle sufficiently to compact.

Regrade after compacting

2 GRADE to smooth, uniform condition free from debris and stone larger
than1 inch

4A LOCATION

a. Strip around perimeter of building. Slope to drain from

buildings
b. Not limited to area within property line if grading shown beyond

3.2.7 OSHA Trench Safety 2 OT

1A STANDARD (TxDOT Item 402)

Requirement for utility trench 5 ft or more in depth per OSHA Part 1926,
Subpart P, Excavations and Texas Health and Safety Code Ann. 756.021
(Vernon 1991)

2A PRODUCT

Trench safety system includes both protective systems and shoring

systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting, trench boxes or trench
shields, slide rail systems, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, dewatering
or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage.

3A EXECUTION (TxDOT Item 402)

3B REMOVAL

At backfill

3.2.8 Paving Asphalt 2 PA

25-199 6873
5-97
1A STANDARD

Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specifications for

Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges

1B SUBGRADE COMPACTION

a. TEST METHOD: ASTM D 1557

b. DENSITY: 95% of maximum density
c. COMPACTION DEPTH: 8 INCH
d. TOLERANCE: 1/2 inch plus or minus
e. LIME STABILIZATION (TxDOT Item 260 & 264): Percent lime per
laboratory determination
f. PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED BASE (plant mix) (TxDOT Item 276)

2A FLEXIBLE BASE (TxDOT Item 247)

a. CRUSHED LIMESTONE: Type A, Grade 3

2B SURFACE COURSE (TxDOT Item 340)

1 TYPE: Hot mix, hot lay asphalt concrete

2 AGGREGATE: Well graded mix of clean shell, crushed stone, sand,

gravel and mineral filler; Type D grading

3 MIX
a. ASPHALT QUANTITY: 4 to 8% by weight of total mix as determined
by design
b. DESIGN: Laboratory density 94-98% by Hveem
c. ASPHALT CEMENT: AC 20 in summer; AC 10 in winter
d. STABILITY: 35% minimum per Hveem

2C PRIMER

a. Emulsion grade SS-1 or CSS-1

3A PLACING BASE COURSE

a. Wet to 8-10% moisture and compact to 95% dense full depth.

Slope min 1%
b. PRIMER: Minimum of 0.2 gal per sq yd

3B HOT MIX ASPHALT SURFACE

a. 98% of laboratory density or the control compaction procedure

3C TOPPING WORKMANSHIP

a. SURFACE: Smooth, hard and well adhered to base course

b. ACCURACY: No puddle deeper than 1/2 inch for slope min 1%

4A SCHEDULE (thickness after compaction, if not shown)

a. BASE COURSE: 6 inch

b. SURFACE COURSE: 2 inch
c. Sub base or compacted structure
d. FILL: 8 inch

26-199 6873
5-97
3.2.9 Paving Concrete 2 PC

1A CONCRETE PAVING (TxDOT Item 360) (governed by Division 3)

a. STRENGTH: (If not on Drawings) 3,000 psi at 28 days

b. ADMIX: Air entraining (5% plus or minus 1%), water reducing,
retarding as required

2A MATERIALS: Unless otherwise shown on the plans or required herein,

all materials shall conform to the requirements of the pertinent TxDOT
Items as follows:

A. Item 421, "Portland Cement Concrete"

b. Item 433, "Joint Sealants and Fillers"
c. Item 437, "Concrete Admixtures"
d. Item 440, "Reinforced Steel"
e. Item 526, "Membrane Curing"

3.2.10 Sewerage, Runoff 2 SR

2A FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS (TxDOT Item 471)

1 MATERIAL
a. ALLOY: Cast iron ASTM A 48, Class 30 or Ductile Iron ASTM A
536, Grade 60-40-18, per Item 471 by TxDOT
b. QUALITY: Metal free of blow hole, porosity, hard spot,
shrinkage defect, crack and other injurious defect
c. MACHINING: Prevent rocking or rattling. Clean dirt, fin and
burr
d. FINISH: Shop coat to resist rust

2 ACCESSORY
a. FRAME: Required unless detail shows omission
b. BOLT: Bronze holddown for grate or lid if weight under 200 lb
and with frame

3 HEAVY DUTY
a. DESIGN: Stiffened in radius, depth and perimeter of cover
b. STANDARD: Comply with Texas Department of Transportation
c. LOCATION: Vehicular paving and abutting walk

4 LIGHT DUTY
a. DESIGN: Min 3/4" thick
b. LOCATION: In planting area

2B PLASTIC PIPE (optional if min 2 feet of cover)

a. MATERIAL: PVC Schedule 40

b. JOINT: Rubber compression gasket; ASTM D3212
c. FITTING: Solvent weld

2C PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE

Arrange per Drawings and condition. Minor variation permitted

2D CONCRETE DESIGN (if not shown otherwise)

3,000 psi 28 day compression strength; max 1-1/2" aggregate

3A PIPE LAYING (slope min .004)

27-199 6873
5-97
 1 TRENCHING
a. DIRECTION: Start from low point to enable continuous drainage
b. PIPE SUPPORT: Final excavation by hand for solid and tightly
fitted support; remove soil to nest and clear hub

2 BACKFILL: Immediately compact backfill under pipe to hold it

securely. Do not cover until inspected. Keep pipe clean

3 COMPACT SOIL as specified under earthwork Section if under paving,

walk or building slab

3B CONSTRUCTION DRAINAGE

Coordinate and schedule permanent storm drainage early enough to

facilitate Work

3C CONNECTION

a. Coordinate onsite connection with plumbing Section

b. Coordinate public sewer connection with utility organization

3.2.11 Sewerage, Sanitary 2 SS

1A STANDARD

City of El Paso Building Code and El Paso Water Utility Public Service
Board Requirements

1B PRECEDENCE

Civil Engineering Drawings govern this Section

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Product data for piping

b. Shop drawings for precast and cast in place manhole and
underground structure; include frame and cover

2A PRODUCT

1 PIPE: PVC and Ductile Iron

2 PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS

a. PVC pipe and fitting, Schedule 40
b. Ductile iron pipe and fitting, ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C51); Ductile
iron pipe and ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110); Ductile iron and gray iron
fittings

3 MANHOLE COVERS
a. Casting for frames, grates, rings and covers, ASTM A 48, Class
30

3A EXECUTION

1 PREPARATION: Trench bottom smooth, firm, even slope; fit to pipe

bottom

2 INSTALLATION
a. Begin at low point
b. Bell end faces upstream
c. Manhole at change in direction
28-199 6873
5-97
 d. Do not reduce pipe size in direction of flow
e. Cleanout to grade as shown

3 TEST
Per City of El Paso Department of Public Utilities Water and Waste
Water requirements and per the El Paso Water Utility Public Service
Board requirements.

3B CONNECTION

1 Coordinate initial connection with plumbing Section

2 Coordinate public sewer connection with El Paso Water Utility Public

Service Board

3.2.12 Treatment, Termite 2 TT

1A WARRANTY

1 Warrant Work for five years against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming.
Defect includes termite activity

2 Replace termite damage within first year and each year thereafter of
maintenance. Warrant building and contents to insurance standard

1B APPLICATOR

a. Bonded
b. Licensed

2A SOLUTION RATIO (Minimum strength by weight)

a. Demon TC 1% by Velsicol
b. Dursban TC 1% by Dow

2B QUANTITY (Working solution)

a. SLAB AREA:1 gallon per 10 sq ft

b. PERIMETER: 2 gallons per 5 lineal ft
c. SLAB JOINT AND LINE UNDER SLAB: Same as perimeter
d. PENETRATION: Min1 gallon each

3A APPLICATION

a. Remove wood from soil

b. Notify supervising authority before commencing Work
c. Do no apply to excessively wet soil
d. Apply solution just before placing slab membrane or vapor
barrier

4A LOCATION

Under building concrete and to 6 inches beyond perimeter

3.2.13 Vehicular Auxiliary 2 VA

1A WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming
29-199 6873
5-97
1B SUBMITTAL

a. Brochure
b. Sample if requested

2A SIGN FOR HANDICAP PARKING

Pavement marking per City of EL Paso Code

2B PAVEMENT MARKING (2 coat)

a. COLOR: White or yellow as selected

b. PAINT FILM THICKNESS: Min 2.5 mils dry
c. MATERIAL: FS TT P 115
d. LINE WIDTH: 4" unless shown otherwise

2C WOOD EDGING

a. MATERIAL: Select Structural 2 per PS 20 70 by American

Softwood Lumber Standard
b. TREATMENT: Wolmanize or equal for ground contact

3.2.14 Water Distribution 2 WD

1A PRECEDENCE

Civil Drawings govern this Section

1B SUBMITTAL

1 Product data for valve, meter and identification

2 Shop drawing for precast and cast in place valve pit, frame and
cover

3 Maintenance data for valve and meter

2A PIPE, FITTING

a. Ductile iron AWWA C151, Class 50 and 51, lining AWWA C164;
gasket AWWA C111 (or cast iron compatible)
b. PVC pipe, Schedule 80
c. Gasket, fitting, valve, anchorage, coupling compatible

2B WATER METER

Furnished by the El Paso Water Utility Public Service

Board

3A EXECUTION

1 PREPARATION: Trench bottom smooth, firm, fitted to piping and bell

2 INSTALLATION
a. Standard for the Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains,
Ductile iron per AWWA C600
b. Polyethylene Encasement of Ductile Iron Pipe per AWWA C105
c. Valve per standard in pit; bronze as shown

30-199 6873
5-97
 3 CLEAN AND TEST
In accordance with the requirements of El Paso Water Utility Public
Service Board

3.3 CONCRETE

3.3.1 Curing, Sealing, Hardening 3 C

1A MATERIAL TO COVER OR FOLLOW THIS WORK

Verify; if potential problem of bond or mutual compatibility, request

instruction before proceeding. Contractor responsible

2A PRODUCT PROHIBITED

a. If leave oily or waxy residue that could interfere with future

coating or adhesive
b. If discolor surface to remain uncovered

2B SHEET CURING (Weight sufficiently to prevent discoloration)

a. WATERPROOF PAPER: ASTM C 171 Type1 or 2, Kraft paper

b. WHITE POLYETHYLENE SHEETING: AASHTO M 171

3A EXECUTION (per supplier's recommendation and instruction)

1 TIMING
a. START: Same day as finish, as soon as practicable
b. DURATION: Min 5 days

2 LOCATION
a. Concrete surface inside, outside, floored, unfloored, on grade
or elevated
b. Curb, gutter, step

3 NOT REQUIRED
a. Slab edge, grade beam face
b. Column, beam if formwork remain min 5 days

4A CURING AND SEALING COMPOUND (if cement finish to remain exposed)

a. GENERAL: May receive adhesive and coating; no cementitious

topping
b. PRODUCT: Sealco 309 by Gifford-Hill or equal; ASTM C 309
c. EXECUTION: Prompt. Per supplier's instruction. Ventilate.
Allow no flame or spark

4B CURING, HARDENING, DUSTPROOFING (water retention requirement per

ASTM C 309)

a. GENERAL: May receive adhesive, coating, topping. Without

residue
b. PRODUCT: Hardtop by Gifford-Hill or equal
c. EXECUTION: Apply when concrete dry; per supplier's instruction.
Promptly brush out any puddle. Promptly clean overrun or spill
with clear water

31-199 6873
5-97
3.3.2 Epoxy Floor Fill 3 EF

1A DESCRIPTION

Refurbish existing cement floor where chipped and spalled

2A PRODUCT

1 SUPPLIER: Concrete Welding & Injection Co or equal

2 EPOXY (2 component with solids)

a. STRENGTH: Min 8000 psi flexure ASTM D 970; min 7200 psi tensile
ASTM A 638; min 10,000 psi compressive in 24 hours at 708F, ASTM D
695
b. BONDING: Min 500 psi after 6 hours at 708F, ASTM C 321;
concrete fail before epoxy fail ASTM C 293
c. ELONGATION: Min 2% in 7 days at 708F, ASTM D 638
d. GEL TIME: Max 4 hours for 5 mil film at 708F

3 AGGREGATE
a. Clean sharp sand only
b. ASTM C 33
c. Fine, feather to zero

4 CLEANER
a. Trisodium phosphate
b. 1001 by CWI if required for oil

5 BONDING AGENT: As recommended by supplier

6 Sealer: Creto by CWI

3A EXECUTION (crew authorized by supplier)

a. Clean entire area

b. Bond for epoxy in damaged area
c. Squeegee on epoxy mix; let set
d. Seal entire area
e. Protect as recommended by supplier

3.3.3 Formwork 3 F

1A FORM DESIGN

1 Soil conditions require that all grade beams be formed

2 ACCURACY OF COMPLETED CONCRETE

a. IF EXPOSED: Visually plumb, level, straight and smooth viewed
from 20 ft, except for removable irregularity
b. SUFFICIENTLY ACCURATE: Accommodate details of abutting work
c. MAXIMUM DEVIATION: 1/4" in 8 ft exposed and 1/2" in 8 ft
covered. Floor, roof: 1/2" of design elevation throughout

3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
a. STRUCTURAL: Adequate form, tile, bracing, shoring
b. APPEARANCE: Achieve specified function and appearance of
concrete
c. DEFLECTION: Max 1/360 span

32-199 6873
5-97
1B STANDARD

a. 347 by ACI
b. Chapter 4 of 301 by ACI

1C COORDINATION (per shop drawing, product data, setting diagram)

a. Form and frame for MEP and other Section requirement

b. Install item per requirement of its Section
c. Execute in timely sequence with work of other Section

2A SLAB MEMBRANE (Vapor barrier)

1 MATERIAL: 6 mil polyethylene plastic PS 17 69 by NBS

2 INSTALLATION: Loose lap 6". Use cement or tape to hold lap.

Patch tear with overlay. Snug screed stake hole acceptable

3 LOCATION: Under earth supported slab and covered part of integral

grade beam

2B FORM COATING AND RELEASE AGENT

1 Supplier warrant in writing that product

a. Will release properly when applied per instruction
b. Will not stain concrete
c. Will not impair bonding of project plaster, paint or coating
d. Free of wax and oil

2 BRAND: Burke product or equal by Southform or Nox-Crete

3 SEQUENCE: Before setting reinforcing

2C WOOD AND PLYWOOD (SPIB, WWPA AND APA grade marked)

a. SUPPORT FRAMING: Min 2 SP or Construction Fir; no loose knot,

leak or weakening characteristic
b. FACE LUMBER (only for surface to be concealed): Min 2 SP or
Construction Fir; S4S; no loose knot or cup, warp or twist
c. FACE PLYWOOD (finish surface): Min 5/8' thick B/B exterior
Plyform; edge sealed; no mill oil; HDP EXT DPGA; non staining or
seal to prevent stain

2D FORM TIE

a. TYPE: Snap, thread or removable; strip to min 1" from surface

b. WIRE: Only if other method not possible. Chip out; remove to
min 1" from surface; patch hole to match or contrast surface as
indicated

2E CORNER AND REVEAL STRIP

a. MATERIAL: Extruded PVC or Geon vinyl shape

b. SHAPE: To profile indicated; beveled for easy, nonbreaking
removal
c. LEAK PROOFING: Gasket if necessary

2F ANCHORAGE

a. SLOT: Min 24 gage steel zinc coated with removable closure

b. INSERT: Wire for ceiling min 7 gage zinc coated; flat insert
33-199 6873
5-97
 zinc coated and match flat hanger under other Section
c. SHELF ANGLE: Lug thread or slot; malleable, cast or mild steel;
nonslip adjustable; min 5/8" bolt with nut

3A EARTH FORM

1 Straight sided grade beam is for separate form. Do not pour in

earth form without permission and additional width and depth. In
absence of instruction assume that foundation side requires form

3B REMOVAL OF FORMWORK (Continue curing and protection)

1 SUPPORTING CONCRETE (beam soffit, slab bottom): Min 4 days and 75%
of 28 day strength, as evidenced by testing field cured
representative samples

2 NOT SUPPORTING CONCRETE (beam, column, wall face): Min 24 hours at

min 508F; only if concrete sufficiently strong to retain shape and
surface

3 FORM FACING: Min 4 days after placement; only if removed without

disturbing shoring and support

3C TEMPORARY OPENING

Provide to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate at base of wall

and column form, as approved for exposed surface

3D CONSTRUCTION KEY

1 LOCATION: As shown, at joint and at end of pour

2 NEW POUR AGAINST HARDENED CONCRETE: Tighten form for shrinkage at

joint

3 KEY REMOVAL: After sufficient set and before next pour

3.3.4 Material and Placing 3 MP

1A STANDARD

ACI 301-83 (latest revision) Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings; ACI 211.1 and ACI 211.2 for proportion; ACI 614 for placing;
ACI 305 for hot and 306 for cold weather; ASTM C 94 and ACI 301 for
transit mixed concrete

1B CONCRETE STRENGTH (28 day test)

See Drawings

1C PRECEDENCE

Structural Drawings govern this Section. Refer to Concrete General

Notes

1D SUBMITTAL

1 MIX DESIGN: Each strength or material class

2 PRODUCT DATA
a. CEMENT: Certified mill report
34-199 6873
5-97
 b. AGGREGATE: Certified sieve analysis
c. ADMIX: Brand and manufacturer

3 READMIX DELIVERY TICKET (Showing)

a. Date
b. Plant
c. Project
d. Contractor
e. Cement type, brand
f. Type, strength, cement/cu yd
g. Truck, number
h. Time dispatched
I. Cubic yards in load
j. Max aggregate size
k. Admix
l. Water content
m. Mix time

2A ADMIX TYPE

1 BRAND: Pozzolith 100, MB-VR by Master Builders; PSI Series by

Gifford-Hill or equal

2 PERFORMANCE
a. AIR ENTRAINING: ASTM C 260
b. WATER REDUCING: (Accelerating or retarding) ASTM C 494; Type A
normal, Type D retard, Type E accelerate

3 PLASTICIZER: PSI Super by Gifford-Hill; ASTM C 494, Type F

2B ADMIX USE

1 DETAIL: Per supplier's instruction

2 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (accelerator/retarder)

a. UNDER 408F; Accelerator
b. 408-808F: Normal
c. OVER 808F: Retarder

3 WATER REDUCING
Typical except footing

4 PLASTICIZER
Per supplier's recommendation

5 AIR ENTRAINING: Vinsol resin dosage per supplier's recommendation,

to air content 4 to 6%

2C CONCRETE MIX

1 COMPONENT: Portland cement ASTM C 150, fine and coarse aggregate,

admix, water drinkable and free of deleterious material

2 PROPORTION: To proper slump, air content, maximum size coarse

aggregate; design to minimize bleeding and segregation

3 SLUMP: At placing max 4" for standard weight; max 3" for
lightweight insulating concrete

4 READYMIX: ASTM C 94 (Job mix only with written approval)

35-199 6873
5-97
 5 SITE ADJUSTMENT
a. SLUMP LESS THAN SUITABLE: Add water (only if approved and
observed) and cement per ratio; do not overrun slump limit
b. REMIX TIME: Min half of original time

2D AGGREGATE

1 FINE: ASTM C 33; sharp; clean; uniformly graded from 4 to 100

2 STANDARD WEIGHT COARSE: ASTM C 33; washed gravel or crushed stone;

graded 7, 67 and 467; max 3/4 clear opening of reinforcement and
1/5 clear opening of form

2E BONDING AGENT

a. Daraweld-C by WR Grace
b. Colma-Fix by Sika Chemical Corp (or stronger 2 component epoxy)
c. Sonocrete by Sonneborn (or stronger 2 component epoxy)

3A PREPARATION

1 ACCURATE SETTING
a. Line
b. Level
c. Elevation
d. Dimension
e. Reinforcement
f. Accessory
g. Insert
h. Per related Section

2 WETNESS
a. MOISTEN: Bearing earth without vapor barrier
b. DRENCH: Wood formwork without form coating or release agent

3 DEBRIS: Remove sand, earth, trash to 100% neat bearing

4 INSPECTION: Do not place without approval

3B PLACING (prevent segregation and void)

a. Place concrete continuously, or so that none is placed against

concrete which has hardened (except at construction joint)
b. If a whole part cannot be placed at once, pour to construction
joint on Drawings or as approved
c. Thoroughly compact concrete during and immediately after placing
with mechanical vibrating equipment or suitable tool. Penetrate
previous lift
d. Do not use vibrator to transport concrete
e. Use screed to level slab
f. Chute or tremie for max 3 ft fall
g. Spray placement only if approved for mix and method

3C CONSTRUCTION JOINT

1 LOCATION: Midspan; against vertical

2 LEVELING NEXT POUR

a. Set screed by instrument
b. Allow for traveling and shrinkage compaction

36-199 6873
5-97
 3 BONDING NEXT POUR
a. Roughen and clean existing surface
b. Apply bonding agent per supplier's instruction

3D CONDUIT SETTING

a. APPROVAL: Required for steel max1 inch diam

b. LOCATION: Above bottom reinforcement

3E WOOD BLOCKING

Permanently embed only if treated per rough carpentry Section and

required by Drawings, Specifications or other Section; or after written
approval

3F SLAB DEPRESSION

Coordinate waterproofing membrane Section

4A SPLASHBLOCK

Precast or cast in place to approval

3.3.5 Reinforcing 3 R

1A STANDARD

a. Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete

Structures, 315 by ACI
b. Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, 301 by ACI
c. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, 318 by ACI
d. Standards for Placing Reinforcing and Supports by CRSI

1B PRECEDENCE

Structural Drawings govern this Section

1C WORK IN OTHER SECTION

1 Non structural reinforcement like roof topping, plaster, title bed

2 Concrete paving and miscellaneous structural reinforcement under

other Section, but governed by this Section

1D SUBMITTAL

1 SHOP DRAWINGS: Show layout, size, bend, spacing, support; omit for
non structural

2 CERTIFICATION OF STEEL
a. AMERICAN: 4 copies of conformance test at mill
b. FOREIGN: Supplier provide ASTM conformance testing by approved
US testing laboratory

2A MATERIAL

a. WIRE FABRIC: ASTM A 185

b. BAR: ASTM A 615 2, 3, Grade 40 or 60; other bar Grade 60 to
ACI 318 bending
c. TIE: 16 gage annealed wire or standard clip

37-199 6873
5-97
2B EXPOSED SUPPORT LEG

a. INTERIOR: Galvanized; plastic coated or solid; stainless steel

b. EXTERIOR: Stainless steel or solid plastic

2C SUPPORT ON EARTH

a. TYPE: High bar chair; base 3x6x20 gage

b. SPACING: Max 4 ft each way

2D FABRICATION

1 METHOD: Cold cut and bend

2 TOLERANCE
a. Sheared length plus or minus one inch
b. Depth of truss bar +0, -1/2 inch
c. Stirrup, tie and spiral plus or minus 1/2 inch
d. Other bend plus or minus one inch

3A PLACING

1 SECURING: Accurate, fixed spacing; proper cover

2 SPLICE NOT DETAILED

a. Stagger at adjacent bar
b. Splice at location of less stress

3 BOND: Remove dirt, base rust, excess scale and bond reducing
foreign matter

4 HEATING: Only with prior approval

3B FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1 INSPECTION: Notify early enough to correct preparation

2 WORK INCREMENT: Place and inspect reinforcement for entire pour

3.3.6 Standard and Special Finishing 3SF

1A COMPATIBILITY WITH OTHER WORK

Prepare concrete surface to receive other work. Assure accuracy,

smoothness, texture and cleanliness

3A CONCEALED FORM FINISH

a. Fill honeycomb, bubble, hole

b. Knock off protruding fin

3B EXPOSED FORM FINISH

a. Fill honeycomb, bubble, hole; knock off fin

b. Chip and patch to remove form mark; latex or epoxy patch if
necessary
c. True up corner, surface
d. Slurry for even color and texture (except grade beam). Add
white cement/sand to compensate dark corrective material

38-199 6873
5-97
3C FLOOR SLAB FINISH

1 LOCATION: Throughout, whether to be left exposed or covered

2 PROCEDURE
a. TROWELING: Steel trowel by hand to final finish so troweling
action causes ringing, evidence of sheen visible
b. TOLERANCE: Maximum irregularity 1/16" in1 ft and 1/4" in 10 ft
c. PROTECTION: Keep exposed finished surface from stain and
physical abuse. If damaged, restore surface to equal strength and
to match
d. KEEP MOIST: Until curing; do not overwet. Fog nozzle
recommended

3D TOOLING

a. LOCATION: Floor edge at expansion joint for neat appearance

b. SIZE: 3/8 inch radius unless shown otherwise

3.3.7 Topping and Grout 3 TG

2A BONDING AGENT

a. TYPE: Commercial made for bonding to dry cementitious material

or neat cement grout; high strength
b. LOCATION: If fill or topping less than 2"; if on dry substrate

c. BRAND: Permunite by L&M; Sikador HiMod by Sika; Sonobond by

Sonneborn

2B GROUT

1 BRAND
a. Supreme by Gifford-Hill
b. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders

2 PERFORMANCE (CRD C 621 by Corps of Engineers)

a. Nonshrink, nonmetallic, non staining
b. 20 day strength min 8,000 psi; bond 6 bar min 1,600 psi

2C STEEL STAIR FILL (float finish)

a. CONCRETE MIX: Hard rock concrete, 3/4" max aggregate; 3,000 psi
at 28 days
b. OPTIONAL MIX: Cement: Sand: Pea gravel by volume 1:1:1-3/4 to
2
c. REINFORCEMENT: Required if shown. If size not shown use 2x2
16/16 mesh or equivalent

2D FILL OR TOPPING MIX

1 AGGREGATE (ACI gradation)

a. FINE: Smaller than 3/8 inch; not over 5% pass No.100 sieve
b. COARSE: Smaller than 1/2 inch; not over 5% pass No.8 sieve

2 PROPORTION: Cement: Fine aggregate: Coarse aggregate, by volume

1:1:1-3/4

3 BONDING: If to concrete structure without separation membrane

39-199 6873
5-97
2E TOPPING REINFORCEMENT

a. LOCATION: Where shown and where topping cannot be bonded to

structural concrete
b. SIZE: If not shown use 2x2 16/16 mesh or equivalent

3A EXECUTION

Per supplier's recommendation and instruction

3.3.8 Topping for Roof 3 TR

1A DEFINITION (same meaning as roof topping)

a. Low density roof fill

b. Insulating roof topping
c. Roof fill
d. Insulating concrete
e. Lightweight roof fill
f. Cementitious roof pour

2A PRODUCT

1 TOPPING
a. LOW DENSITY AGGREGATE: ASTM C 332 Group I, 6-10 pcf vermiculite
or 7.5-12 pcf perlite
b. CEMENT: ASTM C 150 Type I
c. WATER: Clean; non deleterious
d. AIR ENTRAINING: ASTM C 260; liquid vinsol resin

2 REINFORCEMENT: ASTM A 185 4x8 W0.9 x W0.5 galvanized welded wire

fabric (or) 2160-2-1619 galvanized mesh by Keydeck

2B MIX

a. DESIGN: Cement: Aggregate, by weight 1:6

b. STRENGTH: 28 day 180 to 225 psi
c. LIQUID AIR ENTRAINING: One pint per 4 cu ft aggregate
d. WET DENSITY: (At discharge) 45 to 51 pcf for vermiculite; 38 to
42 pcf for perlite
e. DRY DENSITY: 23 to 27 pcf
f. MIX TIME: 1-1/2 minutes
g. SLUMP: 7 inches

2C EXPANSION STRIP (entire perimeter)

a. 1" thick PF614 or PF615 by Owens-Corning or equal

b. 1" thick polystyrene insulation board (Contractor's option)

3A REINFORCING MESH INSTALLATION

Lap end and at sides one mesh; place long wire across support

3B EXPANSION STRIP LOCATION

As shown; if not shown follow supplier's recommendation

3C PLACING (Only at 408F or warmer)

a. SCREED: Temporary for thickness

b. WORKING: Do not rod, tamp or vibrate
40-199 6873
5-97
 c. FINISH: Smooth to 1/4" in 2 ft suitable for roof or insulation

3D PROTECT, CLEAN (before set)

Adjoining work; like formwork, joist, beam, floor

3.4 MASONRY
3.4.1 Accessory and Mortar 4 AM

2A MORTAR MATERIAL

a. HYDRATED LIME: ASTM C 207, Type S

b. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150, Type I
c. MASONRY CEMENT: ASTM C 91, Type II
d. SAND: Sharp; ASTM C 144; color natural
e. WATER: Clean; non deleterious
f. MORTAR ADMIX: OM by Omicron, Hydrocide by Sonneborn or equal
g. COLOR: Inorganic if added; it to remain visible and unpainted,
sand and cement consistent throughout

2B MORTAR MIX

a. TYPE: ASTM C 476, Type N, 1800 psi b. MIX: Cement/hydrated

lime or lime putty/sand, by volume: 1/about 3/4/ 2-1/4 to 3. For
mix using masonry cement, follow ASTM C 476 proportions. Optional
admix per supplier§s instruction
c. MIXING: Thoroughly machine mix for min 3 minutes after material
in mixer
d. ACCELERATOR: No chloride permitted

2C CORRUGATED TIE (for corner and for veneer)

a. WIDTH: 7/8"
b. EDGE: Straight sided
c. MATERIAL: 24 gage galvanized steel
d. LENGTH: Min 3" into masonry for 4" or thicker unit
e. SPACING: Field area 24" by 16"
f. ATTACH: To studs; course level; to slope slightly down to bed

2D REINFORCEMENT

a. STANDARD: ASTM A 82
b. GALVANIZING: ASTM A116 Class 1; 0.4 oz zinc mill coated
c. MAIN WIRE: 3/16" side rods
d. CROSS WIRE: 9 gage truss rod
e. WELD: Flush, do not exceed main wire thickness
f. PATTERN: Truss
g. WIDTH: 1" less than nominal wall thickness
h. SPACING: As indicated in General Notes
I. JOINT: Lap min 12"

3.4.2 Concrete Masonry 4 CM

2A UNIT

a. AGGREGATE: Lightweight ASTM C 331

b. CONCRETE: Not over 95 lb per cu ft ASTM C 140
c. TYPE: Hollow loadbearing unit, Type1
d. STANDARD: ASTM C 90
e. CURING: Age before delivery
f. STRENGTH (masonry): ACI 531; min 1350 psi
41-199 6873
5-97
 g. SUBMITTAL: Sample and brochure
h. SIZE: 8"x16" nominal face. Bullnose exposed corner
I. CONCRETE FILL: Governed by topping and grout Section
j. FIRE RATED: See Drawings

3A LAYING (face bedding)

a. PATTERN: Running bond or as shown

b. REINFORCEMENT: Stop at control joint, expansion joint
c. CORNER: Connect with 9 galvanized wire or corrugated tie or
equal, using one tie for each 4" of nominal wall thickness. Do not
bond units. Fill corner cell with mortar to hold tie
d. WORKMANSHIP: In finished location no edge chipped over 1/4
inch, no corner over 1/2 inch. Amount of chipping limited to good
appearance
e. TIME LIMIT: Mortar in final position within 2-1/2 hours after
mixing if ambient air 808F or higher. Mortar in final position
within 3-1/2 hours if ambient air less than 808F. Discard mortar
not used within limit
f. RETEMPERING: Permitted within time limit
g. METAL DOOR FRAME. Fill jamb solid with mortar; build in anchor
h. LINTEL: Reinforced (unless steel lintel shown). Reinforce as
shown with concrete fill in lintel block; 8" bearing at each jamb
I. BOND BEAM: See Drawings
j. VERTICAL CELL FILL (concrete): For reinforcing as shown; for
sound control in mechanical and toilet space wall if shown. Full
bed each shell around cell receiving fill
k. WEEP: Exterior wythe, bottom course; as shown or directed

3B CONTROL JOINT

a. LOCATION: At max 40 feet if not shown; near opening and corner;

at corner and intersection; at column; at building joint
b. METHOD: If not shown use corner joint fitting or metal tie
specified for corner in full mortar bed

3C JOINT

a. FLUSH: If concealed; if substrate at dampproofing, membrane or

plaster
b. TOOLING: Concave where exposed
c. WIDTH: 3/8"

3.4.3 Stone, Cast 4 SC

1A SUBMITTAL

a. Shop drawings
b. Sample

1B DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

a. In place load detail

b. Handling and attachment detail

2A PRODUCT

1 APPEARANCE: Color, texture and profile match stone as detailed

42-199 6873
5-97
 2 AGGREGATE

a. SIZE: Max 3/4"

b. COLOR: As selected from standard including white

3 CEMENT: Natural, white or buff per selected color

4 REINFORCEMENT: Galvanize if cover less than1 inch

5 CONCRETE STRENGTH: Min 5,000 psi at 28 days

6 MARKING: Nonstain

3A INSTALLATION

1 PREPARATION: Clean, saturate with clean water just before setting

2 SETTING
a. Level and true aligned to face
b. Tap home to full even bearing
c. Fill vertical joint with mortar, rake 1/2" for pointing or
sealant
d. Keep face free of mortar
e. Point joint, tool to concave except at sealant

3 CLEANING: Only clear water and fiber brush

3B PATCHING

a. Max 1/1000 surface

b. Practically invisible
c. Per supplier's instruction
d. Replace irreparable unit

3.5 METAL

3.5.1 Decking Steels 5 DS

1A STANDARD

a. Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members by AISI
b. Structural Welding Code by AWS
c. Steel Roof Deck Manual by SDI
d. Fire rating per UL design indicated and local code

1B SUBMITTAL

GENERAL: Submit each item in this Article to the Conditions of the

Contract and Division1 Specification Sections.

1C PRECEDENCE

Structural Drawings govern this Section

1D UPLIFT

Test roof and overhang per Texas state requirement

43-199 6873
5-97
1E STORAGE

a. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation and other damage

during delivery, storage and handling
b. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide
drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid
condensation.

1F MANUFACTURERS

a. MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

1. Epic Metals Corp.

2. Roof Deck, Inc.
3. United Steel Deck, Inc.
4. Vulcraft Div. Of Nucor Corp.
5. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. Of Wheeling- Pittsburgh Steel
Corp.

2A ROOF DECK

a. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top-flange stiffening

grooves conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and
Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following:

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade C, shop primed

as follows:

A. Shop Primer: Grey of white baked-on, lead- and chromate-

free rust-inhibitive primer, conforming to the performance
requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-P-664.

2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 SQ, Grade 33, G 90 (ASTM

A 446M, Grade A, Z 275) zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM
A 525M).
3. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib.
4. Profile Depth: As shown on Structural Drawings.
5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As shown on structural
Drawings.
6. Span Condition: Triple span or more
7. Span Condition: As indicated
8. Side Joints: Overlapped

2B FLOOR DECK

a. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels with integrally

embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps,
conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary
for Composite Steel Floor Deck," the minimum section properties
indicated, and the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 SQ, Grade 33, G 90 (ASTM

A 446M, Grade A, Z 275) zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM
A 525M).
2. Profile Depth: As indicated.
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As shown on Structural
Drawings.
4. Span Condition: Triple span or more
5. Span Condition: As indicated

44-199 6873
5-97
2C FORM DECK

a. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet

noncomposite form deck panels conforming to SDI Publication No. 28
"Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Floor Deck,"
the minimum section properties indicated, and the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 SQ, Grade 33, G 90 (ASTM

A 446M, Grade E, Z 275) zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM
A 525M).
2. Profile Depth: 9/16 inch (14 mm).
3. Profile Depth: As shown on Structural Drawings.
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As shown on Structural
Drawings.
5. Span Condition: As indicated
6. Side Joints: Overlapped.

2D ACCESSORIES

a. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply

with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck
manufacturer

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-

resistant, low-velocity, powder-actuated or pneumatically driven
carbon steel fasteners; or self drilling, self-threading screws

c. Galvanized Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P- 21035, with

dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

3A EXAMINATION

a. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of steel deck.

3B PREPARATION

a. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting

members.

3C INSTALLATION, GENERAL

a. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable

specifications and commentary of SDI Publication No. 28,
manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section
b. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting
framing without warp or deflection.

3D ROOF DECK INSTALLATION

a. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot

(puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds
with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panel at each support.
Space welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, with a
minimum of two welds per unit at each support.
3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.
45-199 6873
5-97
 4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location

b. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and
perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not
exceeding 36 inches (910 mm), using the following method:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10-(4.8 mm)

diameter or larger carbon screws.

3E FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

a. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified
requirements

b. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected work with specified requirements.

3F REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

a. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized

coatings on both surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions.

3.5.2 Joist 5 J

1A STANDARD

a. Steel Joist Institute

b. American Institute of Steel Construction
c. Per OSHA for masonry or concrete bearing

1B PRECEDENCE

Structural Drawings govern this Section

1C SUBMITTAL

1 Shop and installation drawings in number of copies and type of

prints as directed. Do not begin Work before approval

2 Certificate of compliance with SJI or Standard Specifications and

load Tables by AISC

2A JOIST

a. BEARING: Flat to structure

b. TOP CHORD: Angles or tee
c. CONNECTION: Bolt to column; weld to beam bearing
d. PROVIDE: Accessory, joist header, attachment
e. BRIDGING: Cross bridging or angle standard for K Series
f. ACCESSORY: Include opening framing, anchor, insert, angle,
extension, sage rod, hole

2B SHOP PRIME

a. PREPARATION: Clean to SSPC SP2

b. PRIMER: Supplier's standard; min1 mil dry film

3A ERECTION

a. BRACING: Install bridging and sag rod; anchor bridging end

46-199 6873
5-97
 before loading
b. FASTENING: Fillet weld to structure 1-1/2" x 3/16" each side
c. TOUCH UP: Damager pay cost

3.5.3 Lightgage Stud 5 LS

1A STANDARD

Light Gage Cold-formed Steel Design Manual by AISI

1B SUBMITTAL

Product data showing size, gage, load chart

1C PRECEDENCE

Structural Drawings govern this Section

2A MINIMUM REQUIREMENT

a. 16 GAGE AND HEAVIER: ASTM A 570 or A 446 Grade D:

50,000 psi
b. 18 GAGE AND LIGHTER: ASTM A 611 Grade C, or A 446
Grade A: 33,000 psi
c. TRACK AND BRIDGING: Same

2B FINISH

a. Rust inhibiting red oxide, FS TT P 636 red zinc chromate or

equal
b. Hot dip galvanize optional

2C TYPE

Structural screw cee; punched web; flange min 1-5/8",

return 1/2"

2D DESIGN (if not shown)

a. WIND LOAD: 20 lbs per sq ft

b. DEFLECTION: 1/360 of span
c. GAGE: Exterior wall stud 18 minimum
d. SPACING: Studs at 16" max; close if shown or required for load
e. BRIDGING: Min1 row per floor; more per supplier's
recommendation

2E ACCESSORY

Include anchor, brace and clip unless shown under

structural steel

3A EXECUTION

a. TRACK: Attach at max 32"; splice by weld or channel insert

b. STUD SPLICE: Not permitted
c. WELD: Free of burnout and void
d. CORNER: 3 studs for facing attachment
e. VERTICAL LOAD BRIDGING: Rows at 3'-4"
f. WIND LOAD ONLY BRIDGING: Rows at max 5 feet
g. TOUCH UP: If exposed to view

47-199 6873
5-97
3.5.4 Metal Fabrication 5 M F

1A GENERAL

a. RELATED WORK: Structural steel, metal prefabrication, custom

cover
b. SUBMITTAL: Shop Drawings

1B STANDARD

Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards, 2d Edition (1980) by American

Institute of Steel Construction Inc

2A STEEL

a. STRUCTURAL SHAPE, PLATE, BAR: ASTM A 36; tolerance ASTM A 6

b. STRUCTURAL TUBULAR: ASTM A 500 Grade B; ASTM A 501
c. PIPE: ASTM A 53 Type E or S Grade B: Schedule 40 if not shown
d. GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET: ASTM A 526; 1.25 oz zinc ASTM A 525

2B GALVANIZING (After fabrication)

a. ASTM A 123: Shape, plate, bar and strip 1/8" thick min
b. ASTM A 386: Assembled product

2C STEEL SHOP PRIMER

a. PREPARATION: Remove loose scale, rust, contamination per SSPC

SP2
b. PRIMER: FS or SSPC for use over contact preparation: FS TT P
86 Type I, II; or SSPC Paint 4 64T or TT P 636C iron oxide zinc
chromate alkyd, or proprietary equal. Min1 mil thick dry film

3A STEEL WORKMANSHIP

1 CLASS1 (highest grade)

a. EXPOSED SURFACE: Grind smooth; fill or grind pit, mill mark,
nick and scratch; show no defect painted; break corner and ease edge
b. WELD: Conceal or grind to show no defect painted
c. BOLT: If exposed, flat head countersunk
d. STRAIGHTNESS: No visible distortion

4A TYPICAL STEEL ITEM (Workmanship and finish)

1 CLASS1 (shop prime)

2 CLASS 2 (shop prime)

a. Interior steel stair
b. Interior handrail
c. Interior attachment

3 CLASS 2 (galvanize) (shop prime)

Exterior steel fence (hot dip after fabrication)

4 CLASS 3 (shop prime)

5 CLASS 3 (galvanize)
a. Loose lintel
b. Pit ladder (hot dip after fabrication)

48-199 6873
5-97
3.5.5 Structural Steel 5 SS

1A GENERAL

a. PRECEDENCE: Structural Drawings govern this Section

b. SUBMITTAL: Shop Drawings showing quantity, location, dimension,
joint, material and finish. Anchor bolt drawings timely
c. COORDINATE: Clear concrete min 1". Weld masonry anchor
supplied under accessory and mortar Section

1B STANDARD

a. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges by

AISC
b. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings by AISC
c. Manual of Steel Construction by AISC
d. Structural Welding Code D1.1 by AWS
e. Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts by AISC
f. Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards by AISC
g. A Guide to the Shop Painting of Structural Steel by AISC
h. If to remain in view, appearance Architectural per AISC

2A TYPICAL MATERIAL

a. STEEL SHAPE, BAR AND PLATE: ASTM A 36; tolerance ASTM A 6

b. PIPE COLUMN: ASTM A 53 Type E or S Grade B; Schedule 40 if not
shown
c. BOLT: ASTM A 307 Grade A or ASTM A 305; High Strength ASTM A
325 or ASTM A 490. Include affidavit
d. ANCHOR BOLT: ASTM A 307 Section 1.3
e. TUBING: ASTM A 500 Grade B; ASTM A 501

2B SHOP PRIMER

a. MINIMUM PREPARATION: Break corner; ease edge. Remove loose

mill scale, loose rust, oil, grease, contaminant per SSPC SP2, to
SSPC Vis1 criteria
b. ACCEPTABLE PRIMER: FS TT P 86 Type I or II SSPC Paint 4 64T or
TT P 636C iron oxide zinc chromate alkyd primer or supplier standard
if approved
c. PRIMER THICKNESS: Min1 mil dry film
d. PRIMER OMISSION: If galvanized; if steel will be concealed

2C GALVANIZING (ASTM A 384 and A 385)

a. STANDARD: ASTM A 123 after fabrication; min 1.8 oz zinc per sq

ft
b. LOCATION: Where shown, and exterior unless completely covered

2D DAMAGE TO SHOP PRIMER AND GALVANIZING

Correction made or paid for by damager

2E FABRICATION WELDING (per Standard)

a. Equipment, sequence and weld size to minimize distortion

b. Balance assembly and weld to avoid warp
c. Chip and wirebrush weld visible in final location

49-199 6873
5-97
2F CUTOUT, HOLE, CLEARANCE

a. Provide for other Section if information timely

b. Detail steel min 1" from concrete or other product except as
governed by UL requirement or Drawings
c. Drill or punch; do no burn

3A ERECTION

a. GROUT: Governed by Concrete Division

b. ADJUST: Before permanent fastening

3B FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

a. Test for compliance if dubious; evidence compliance after rework

b. Error tolerance 1:500

3C METHOD DETAIL

a. Clean bearing and permanent contact surface before assembly

b. Adjust for discrepancy in dimension as approved
c. Splice only per Standard and Drawings
d. Correct to not weaken structure
e. Allow for temperature variation at erection and completion
f. Ream hole to enlarge for bolt; do not modify unfair hole by
burning or by drift pin except for secondary member

4A INCLUDED ITEM

Miscellaneous framing, bracing, anchor except metal

fabrication Section item

3.6 WOOD & PLASTIC

3.6.1 Architectural Woodwork 6 AW

1A DESCRIPTION

Specially fabricated wood item, special size, molded shape, hardwood,

cabinet

1B STANDARD

Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Industry by AWI.

Custom grade unless otherwise specified

1C SUBMITTAL

a. SHOP DRAWINGS: Sufficient to show agreement with Contract

Documents and coordination with other Work; show location
b. SAMPLE: Natural finish wood species, plastic laminate

2A TRIM (Softwood unless otherwise shown)

a. LENGTH: One piece under 9 feet

b. EDGE: Ease to about 1/16" if exposed
c. MOLDING: Stock shape unless special shown

2B SOLID STOCK

a. MOISTURE: 8 to 13% of oven dry weight at installation

50-199 6873
5-97
 b. PAINT GRADE HARDWOOD: Any close grain species including parana
pine; no oak, elm or other coarse grain species
c. SPECIES FOR NATURAL FINISH: Select white oak (for interior
handrail)

2C PLASTIC LAMINATE (high pressure)

a. THICKNESS: 1/16" top; 1/32" other; balance sheet per AWI

b. SUBSTRATE: 3/4" APA Grade B plywood; or (except shelf) water
resistant particle board
c. PATTERN: As selected from standard, solid and woodgrain
d. SUPPLIER: Formica, Micarta, Nevamar, Pioneer, Wilson Art

3A JOINERY

Cut to accurate, force fit; scarf joint, cope inside corner

and miter outside corner. Hairline fit joint. Scribe to
irregularity

3B NAILING (option comparable screw, adhesive method)

a. SETTING: Drive below surface for puttying where exposed

b. CONCEALED NAILING: If possible
c. SPACING: Secure members at 12 to 24 inches; double nail
width over 4"
d. NAIL: Finishing or casing type. Typically bright steel for
interior

4A CABINET WORK

1 THICKNESS (unless shown otherwise)

a. BOTTOM, END, DIVIDER: 3/4"; thinner if reinforced as approved
b. FACE, WEB FRAME, DRAWER FRONT: 3/4 "
c. DRAWER BACK, SIDE: 1/2"
d. CABINET BACK, DRAWER BOTTOM: 1/4"
e. SHELF: 3/4" thick to 3 ft span, 7/8" to 3-1/2 ft, 1-1/16" to 4
ft

2 DUST PANEL: If on Drawings

3 BASE: See resilient floor tile Section. Base space 3" deep by 4"
high at front, 1/2" deep at exposed end unless shown otherwise

4 DOOR: Overlay unless shown otherwise. If 1-3/8" or more thick see

wood door Section. Omit edge binding on door tops over 6 ft up and
on bottoms lower than 3 feet

4B CABINET HARDWARE

1 SHELF SUPPORT: Flush standard; 255 or 80 by KV, zinc plate or

Anachrome; include mating support and bracket

2 DOOR CATCH: Magnetic; 41 ALD by Stanley

3 HINGE (for 3/4" overlay door)

a. NUMBER: Pair for door to 32" high; 1-1/2 pair for taller door
b. BRAND: Satin zinc plated; 331 by Stanley

4 PULLS (unless door and drawer shaped for grip)

a. TYPE: Hairpin 3" high, 5/16" diam
b. BRAND: 4483 by Stanley, US26 polished chrome
51-199 6873
5-97
 5 DRAWER SLIDE: 1300 by KV

6 LOCK: 5 pin tumbler; masterkey as directed; 4 keys per lock shown

on Drawings

4C SCHEDULE

a. CABINET: Paint grade softwood exposed and semiexposed surface;

plastic laminate top, splash, edge
b. MOLDING AND TRIM: Paint grade softwood
c. SHELF, ROD, SUPPORT: Paint grade softwood; 1/4" thick strip on
plywood edge

3.6.2 Carpentry, Finish 6 CF

1A WORK INCLUDED

a. MATERIAL: Exposed to view stock lumber yard material not

requiring shop fabrication
b. INSTALLATION: Finish carpentry material, architectural
woodwork, wood door, finish hardware

2A GRADING

a. INTERIOR FINISH, TRIM: B and better white or ponderosa pine

b. SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD: Paint Grade A by APA; stamped
c. EXTERIOR: Not used

3A APPLICATION

a. SELECTION: Examine each piece; select best material for most

prominent location
b. INSTALLATION: Cut to accurate, force fit; scarf joint; cope
inside corner; miter outside corner. True, plumb, level, square.
Attach securely

3B NAILING

a. SPACING: Secure; typically space from 12 to 24", 2 nails for

widths over 4"
b. CONCEAL: When possible; blind nail or set for puttying
c. NAILS, INTERIOR: Bright steel finish or casing

3.6.3 Carpentry, Rough 6 CR

1A STANDARD

a. MINIMUM: American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20 70

b. GRADING: APA, SFPA, SPIB, WCLIB, WWPA
c. MARK: Each piece with grade, moisture, association, species

1B GENERAL

a. SPECIES: No low strength wood like redwood, cedar or subalpine

fir
b. SURFACING: 4 sides unless shown otherwise
c. SEASONING: Kiln or air dried to 15% max moisture marked KD or
MC 15, or dried to 10% max moisture and marked S DRY

52-199 6873
5-97
2A PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

a. PRODUCT DATA: Submit treatment method if requested

b. STANDARD: Retention and type per AWPA; each piece marked
c. CUT TREATMENT: If exposed paint or dip with matching
preservative

3A INSULATION

a. Set wood framing accurately and neatly. Brace well and nail
securely. Frame at 16" unless shown otherwise
b. Set wood ground for attachment under other Section
c. Use washer on bolt attaching wood; galvanized at treated wood
d. Panel, plywood per recommendation of American Plywood
Association

3B GROUND

a. SCOPE: Provide ground for attachment under other Sections

b. SIZE, LOCATION: Verify requirement with Section needing ground
c. THICKNESS: If not shown otherwise 2" nominal for loads or if
subject to pull or wear

4A GYPSUM SHEATHING SYSTEM

a. TYPE: ASTM C 79 water resistant gypsum, weatherproof asphalt

faces, or Triple Sealed by USG
b. SIZE: 5/8 inch thick by 24 inch wide; length of 4, 6 or 8 feet
(fire rated)
c. APPLICATION: Horizontal direction; fasten at 8", 6" at edges
d. JOINT COVER: 3" min width roofing felt strips in roofing cement
or cover entire wall with 15 building felt or 4 mil black plastic
sheet

4B BACKER BOARD

a. BRAND: Wonder-Board by Modulars Inc or Dens-Shield by Georgia

Pacific
b. LOCATION: Substrate for ceramic tile in wet wall

3.7 WEATHER PROTECTION

3.7.1 Dampproofing Wall 7 DW

1A SINGLE RESPONSIBILITY

Bid with wall flashing Section to form one unit of Work

1B WARRANTY

2 years against
a. Leaking water or bitumen
b. Releasing from substrate

1C STANDARD

National Roofing Contractors Association

53-199 6873
5-97
2A BITUMINOUS EMULSION (water soluble asphalt compound)

a. FIBERED: ASTM D 1227 Type 1. Fiber proportion per application

type
b. UNFIBERED: ASTM D 1187 Type1

2B SOLVENT BASED MASTIC (cutback) (Contractor's option)

a. TROWEL MASTIC: ASTM D 2822 Type1 or FS SS C 00153C Type 1,

Class A and B
b. SEMI MASTIC: ASTM D 2823 or FS SS A 694D

2C REINFORCING

GLASS FABRIC: ASTM D 1668 or FS HH C 466B; 20x10 thread count, coated

3A SUBSTRATE

Surface free of oil, grease, dirt, cement laitance, projection and

depression

3B AMBIENT TEMPERATURE FOR INSTALLATION

Min 408F

3C APPLICATION (per supplier's instruction)

1 BITUMINOUS EMULSION (Moisten substrate if dry) (Protect from water

until cured)
a. FIBERED: Spray or brush 2 coats at 1/16" thick each, allowing
to dry between coats; or trowel one coat 1/8" thick
b. UNREINFORCED: Spray 2 coats at 75-100 sq ft per gallon per coat
c. PROTECTION BOARD (if below grade with hydrostatic relief): Per
supplier's recommendation. Cure dampproofing min 24 hrs before
placing

2 SOLVENT BASED MASTIC (cutback) (dry substrate)

a. SAFETY: Volatile solvent may collect in low area. Verify
danger, protective measure
b. FIBERED PER METHOD OF INSTALLATION: Proceed as for fibered
bituminous emulsion above
c. PROTECTION BOARD (if needed): Proceed as for fibered bituminous
emulsion above

3 REINFORCING (were dissimilar materials meet)

a. Embed one glass fabric ply in first coat without wrinkle or air
pocket
b. Cover fabric with additional coat
c. Lap fabric min 2" at fabric joint and substrate joint

4A LOCATION

a. Wall flashing
b. Interior face of masonry wall above grade, where covered by
additional withe, furring, drywall or other finish
c. Foundation wall below grade if hydrostatic relief system in place

3.7.2 Flashing Wall 7 FW

1A SINGLE RESPONSIBILITY

54-199 6873
5-97
Bid with wall dampproofing Section to form one unit of Work

2A SUPPLIER (plastic flashing) (if covered)

a. BFG by Lexsuco
b. Phoenix Bldg Prod
c. Nervastral by Rubber & Plastic Compound
d. Sandell

2B PRODUCT

1 PLASTIC FLASHING (if covered)

a. TYPE: 100% pure virgin PVC
b. EXPOSURE TEST: ASTM D 822
c. TEMPERATURE TEST: No crack at -208F wrapped over 1/32" mandrel
d. LABEL: Permanent supplier's name
e. THICKNESS: Min 30 mil

2 ADHESIVE: Flashing cement, trowel or knife grade asphalt mastic FS

SS C 153B, Class B

3A APPLICATION

a. Full coat min 2-1/2 gals adhesive per 100 sq ft

b. Embed flashing; roll out wrinkle, air pocket and bulge
c. Minimize laps; where necessary lap min 3 inches
d. Extended head and still flashing 6 inches beyond opening
e. Do not increase size of mortar joint

4A NEOPRENE FLASHING SYSTEM (if exposed to light)

a. SHEET MATERIAL: 1/16" thick uncured, by GEC industries or equal

b. ADHESIVE: Contact type by sheet manufacturer; roofing cement
prohibited
c. ADHESIVE APPLICATION: 100% of contact area

4B LOCATION

a. In exterior wall to divert moisture to outside

b. Over head and under sill, at jamb of opening
c. Building perimeter at grade beam
d. As shown

4C METAL "FLASHING"

Governed by roof metal Section but under this Section responsibility

3.7.3 Insulation, Batt and Blanket 7 IB

1A SUBMITTAL

Catalog brochure

2A PRODUCT

1 TYPE
a. FORM: Batt or blanket
b. FIBER: Mineral wool or glass fiber
c. COVERING: Foil one side
d. MINIMUM SPEC: FS HH1 521 E; Type I, II or III

55-199 6873
5-97
 2 FLAME RESISTANCE
a. TEST METHOD: ASTM E 84
b. UL LABEL: Required
c. RATING: Maximum flame spread 25; fuel contributed 20; smoke
developed 20

3 THERMAL RESISTANCE: (Manual J by National Warm Air Heating and Air

Conditioning Contractor's Association)
a. 6" NOMINAL: R-19
b. 4" NOMINAL: (Full thick) R-11

3A APPLICATION

a. HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL (unsupported): Retain by galvanized mesh

or galvanized 18 gage wires at 12" max and cross wires at 8 ft max
b. STUD SPACE (closed both sides): Glass fiber may be non faced if
totally fill stud space in 3 dimensions
c. STUD SPACE (open one side): Retain insulation with cross wires
at 12" max
d. INSTALLATION: Snugly fit; permanently retained

3B INSPECTION

Do not cover until approved

4A LOCATION

As shown: Smug up under roof deck. Leaving vent space at eave and
ridge

3.7.4 Insulation, Loose 7 IL

1A WARRANTY

Warrant for two years against becoming unserviceable because defective

or nonconforming

1B SUBMITTAL

Product data

1C STANDARD

ASTM C 250, 5-8 pcf

2A PRODUCT

a. TYPE: Special water repellent free flowing lightweight

aggregate
b. K FACTOR: Max 0.38
c. FIRE RATING: Incombustible

2B BRAND

a. Perlite
b. Vermiculite

3A EXECUTION

a. Close openings that could leak insulation

b. Fill to top and tamp lightly; refill to top
56-199 6873
5-97
 c. Cover to protect and retain until permanent closure

4A LOCATION

Fill cells of CMU in exterior wall

3.7.5 Insulation, Mechanical Space 7 IM

1A WARRANTY

Warrant for two years against becoming unserviceable because defective

or nonconforming like

a. Releasing from substrate

b. Delamination of layers
c. Releasing particles

2A BLANKET OPTION

a. THICKNESS: Nominal 2 inches unless shown otherwise

b. BLANKET: Neoprene impregnated muslin laminated to glass fiber
core of density varying to sound insulation shown
c. FASTENING: Adhesive, tape, resilient clip

2B SPRAYED OPTION

BRAND: K13 by National Cellulose Corp, Certa Spray by CertainTeed or

equal

3A EXECUTION

a. SUPPLIER'S INSTRUCTION: Follow except install according to

these Specifications if more restrictive
b. BLANKET INSULATION: Attach to wall without changing acoustical
quality. Mechanically fasten top to wall. Tape joint; prepare
surface for painting

3.7.6 Joint Sealing 7 JS

1A WARRANTY

One year against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in appearance

because defective or nonconforming. Want Work not to
a. Show staining from abutting material and filler
b. Migrate, bleed into or stain abutting material
c. Deform enough to become unsightly or cause leak
d. Chalk, dust or change color
e. Separate or break if elongation less than 1/4 width
f. Harden to more than 25% over specified hardness

1B SUBMITTAL

Sample and literature sufficiently early to coordinate with

other work

2A SUPPLIER

a. A C Horn
b. DAP
c. Dow
d. GE
57-199 6873
5-97
 e. Manville
f. Pecora
g. PRC
h. Sonneborn
I. Tremco

2B EXTERIOR SEALANT

1 PRIMER: Use no sealant which requires primer for nonporous or

slightly porous substrate

2 BASIS TYPE (butyl, acrylic, polysulfide, urethane, silicone)

a. ACCEPTABLE: One or two part compound that cures or polymerizes
by solvent release, moisture absorption or catalyst
b. UNACCEPTABLE: Linseed oil or other oil base, asphaltic
or coal tar

3 TACK FREE TIME: Max 24 hour at 50% relative humidity and 708F

4 COLOR: Standard selection

5 SOLID: Min 96% by volume

6 CURED HARDNESS (Shore A Durometer): Max 35 typical. Min 40 for

walk, floor, paving

2C CONCEALED SEALANT

a. Non skinning
b. Suitable for use without primer
c. Any acceptable for exposed use
d. Linseed oil or other oil base type

2D INTERIOR SEALANT (exposed to view) (except floor)

Same as exterior but following variations are acceptable
a. TYPE: Skinning type, bulk compound per FS TT S 230A
b. BASIC INGREDIENT: Acrylic, butyl or similar paintable compound

2E ACCESSORY

1 BACKUP FILLER
a. TYPE: Expanded, closed cell plastic or rubber
b. PROPERTIES: Non absorbent, nonstaining, compatible with sealant
c. NONSUITABLE MATERIAL: Oily or bituminous
d. SHAPE: Round, square or rectangular
e. SIZE: As recommended by manufacturer

2 PRIMER, CLEANER, TOPCOAT: Only if listed as suitable in

manufacturer's specification. Test for staining, compatibility and
durability before proceeding

3A APPLICATION
Tool exposed joints as shown. If not shown, tool to slightly concave
using slicking material recommended by manufacturer. Press sealant
against sides of groove. Leave not material feathered out or smeared on
abutting material. If necessary protect adjacent surface with tape.
Finished joint appearance uniform, professional. Follow supplier's
specific instruction.

58-199 6873
5-97
3.7.7 Roofing, Builtup 7 RB

1A SINGLE RESPONSIBILITY

Bid this Section with

a. Roofing metal
b. Roof flashing
c. Roof insulation

1B WARRANTY

Warrant for 2 years against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in

appearance because defective or nonconforming. Correct if faulty Work
causes injurious results like

a. Leakage of water inside building or into construction

b. Leakage of bitumen inside or outside
c. Blistering, tearing, other product failure

2A ORGANIC TYPE (Gravel) (UL Class A)

1 BASE SHEET
a. MATERIAL: Organic felt; asphalt saturated and coated 2 sides;
43 lbs per square, ASTM D 2626, Type I
b. APPLICATION: Lay dry; nail at 9" thru lap, at 18" along edge in
12"

2 ROOF PLY (3 plies)

a. MATERIAL: 15 perforated, organic fiber, asphalt ASTM D 226,
Type 15 or FS HH R 595 Type II; Class I
b. APPLICATION: Full hot mop steep asphalt, 23 lb per square per
ply

3 AGGREGATE: Embed in poured flood coat of 60 lbs asphalt per

square

2B OPTIONAL GLASS FIBER TYPE (Option in lieu of organic) (Gravel) (UL

Class A)

1 BASE PLY
a. MATERIAL: Asphalt impregnated glass fiber felt; min 9 lb per
square; tensile strength both ways min 50 lbs per inch; ASTM D 2178,
Type IV
b. APPLICATION: Lay dry; nail at 9" thru lap, at 18" along edge in
12"

2 ROOF PLY (2 plies)

a. MATERIAL: Same as base ply
b. APPLICATION: Full hot mop steep asphalt 25-30 lb per ply per
square

3 AGGREGATE: Embed in poured flood coat of min 60 lb asphalt per

square

2C MATERIAL AND PRODUCT CONTROL

High quality, conforming to industry standards, by well known and

experienced supplier, equal to Celotex, GFA, J-M, Koppers, Owens-Corning

2D TYPICAL MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

59-199 6873
5-97
 1 ROOFING AGGREGATE
a. SPECIFICATION: ASTM D 1863
b. SIZE: 1/4 to 3/4 inch
c. MATERIAL: Rounded river gravel, brown or other dun color

2 ASPHALT (flood coat for slope in inches per foot) a. SPECIFICATION:

ASTM D 312 or FS SS A 666
b. 0" TO 1/2": Dead level, Type I
c. 1/2" to 3": Steep, Type III
d. OVER 3": Special steep, Type IV

3 NAIL
a. GENERAL: Separate disc if nail head less than 1" diam
b. FOR ROOF FILL: Capped ES, Tube-Loc, Zonotite III, Nail- Tite

4 SHEATHING PAPER: Only if base sheet on wood or plank deck

3A OBSERVATION

a. Work by steps that permit observation of each step before

coverup
b. If Work requires immediate coverup, give notice in sufficient
time to arrange observation

3B UPLIFT

Nailing per industry standard to achieve 30 psf resistance

3C AGGREGATE, INSTALLATION

Apply sufficient quantity to thoroughly embed full layer of aggregate

over entire surface. Spread evenly so no bitumen shows. Remove excess
aggregate, but keep bitumen shadowed by aggregate

3D EXECUTION

1 HEATING
a. THERMOMETER: Required on kettle
b. TEMPERATURE: Max 4008F

2 MOISTURE
a. FELT: Not wet
b. WATER CUTOFF: Install at workday end; remove for next Work
c. IF CONDENSATION: Test bond. If bitumen can be separate from
substrate, do not mop or cement

3 COMPLETION: Prompt once started

4 REUSE OF PLY: Prohibited

5 WORKMANSHIP: Apply parallel and at right angle; smooth

without smear, overlap or spatter on other work

6 CLEANUP: Area of Work; any stain of other work

8 HOISTING (or pumping): Side or back of building

8 MELT POT; Keep min 20 ft from building

60-199 6873
5-97
3.7.8 Roof Flashing 7 RF

1A SINGLE RESPONSIBILITY

Bid this Section with

a. Builtup roofing
b. Roofing metal
c. Roof insulation

1B SUBMITTAL

1 PRODUCT DATA: Schedule, performance, material variation, accessory,

installation recommendation

2 SAMPLE: Individual item if required; usable in Work

2A SUPPLIER (if not listed herein)

Same as for builtup roofing Section

2B ACCESSORY

1 ROOFING CEMENT: ASTM D 2822; Elastigum by Celotex, Flashtite by

GAF, Vitalastic 304 by Gulf-Seal

2 CANT: Asphalt impregnated nailable fiber; 45 degree; 6" height; min

1-1/2" thick; if treated wood, see rough carpentry Section

3 WALKWAY BOARD
a. CONSTRUCTION: Mineral granule surface; asphalt impregnated
organic material; ASTM D 517; 1/2" thick
b. BRAND: Carey-Tred by Celotex, Roofwalk by J & P Petroleum Prod,
Walk-on Board by Koppers

4 MISCELLANEOUS
a. ITEM (See Drawings): Equipment support, roof curb, pipe support
and seal
b. SUPPLIER: Custom Curb Inc., Pate Co, Thybar Corp

2C FLASHING (flexible flashing)

Flash entire roofing system 100% watertight by bituminous material and

elastic material, with no reliance on metal flashing (Joint tends to
make metal redundant for water resistance). Use of roofing sheet metal
is for appearance and cover

2D EXPOSED FLASHING (flexible flashing)

SYSTEM: 1/16" thick neoprene sheet, 100% adhered by contact; toe

extension double stripped; roofing cement prohibited; use acrylic
sealant

2E BASE FLASHING (if glass fiber plies)

As recommend by Owens-Corning

3A METAL FLANGE FLASHING

a. FLANGED ITEM: Like gravel stop, vent, skylight, hatch, pitch

pan
b. PRIME: If metal shows oiliness or lack of bond to bitumen
61-199 6873
5-97
 c. BEDDING FLANGE: Press into full bed of roofing cement. Nail if
over wood nailer
d. FELT STRIP: Minimum 5" wide for first; min 8" wide for second;
15 std felt with organic plies; glass felt with glass fiber plies
e. STRIP APPLICATION: Hot mop with steep asphalt or bed in roofing
cement

4A GRAVEL STOP SUBFLASH

a. MATERIAL: 30 mil vinyl or Moistop by ST Regis

b. INSTALLATION: Under roof plies at gravel guard, 6" wide on roof
deck. Turn down on vertical face minimum 1-1/2" past bottom of
wood nailer. Cement or mop roof on subflashing

4B ROOF EXPANSION JOINT COVER

a. TYPE: Prefabricated rubber; 26 gage galvanized flange; foam

neoprene insulation
b. LENGTH: 50 foot roll
c. BRAND: EJ 100-4 by Manville or comparable product by Carlisle
or Lexsuco
d. SUBFLASHING: 30 mil neoprene; locate under roof plies; adhere
roofing to subflashing; 12" width if not shown
e. FITTING: Factory fabricated

4C ROOF VENT

a. BRAND: FP-10 by Johns-Manville, VPR by Lexsuco, 1B-2 by

Telemark
b. SIZE: About 6 or 10" ht, 10 or 12" diam flange; min 3 sq inch
open
c. INSTALLATION: Into low density roof topping per supplier's
instruction. Set flange in roofing cement; strip flash over
d. SPACING: Min one per 5 squares

3.7.9 Roof Insulation Abstract of Work 7 RI

1A SINGLE RESPONSIBILITY

Bid this Section with

a. Built up roofing
b. Roof flashing
c. Roofing metal

1B WARRANTY

Warranty for 2 years against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in

appearance because defective or nonconforming. Correct if faulty work
causes injurious result like

a. Releasing from substrate

b. Delaminating

1C SUBMITTAL

Catalog brochure

2A ACCESSORY

1 STEEP ASPHALT: ASTM D 312; Type IV; 205-2258F softening

62-199 6873
5-97
 2 PRIMER (for concrete and roof topping)
a. MATERIAL: ASTM D 44
b. QUANTITY:1 gal per 100 sq ft

2B INSULATION BOARD CENTER

1 BRIEF DESCRIPTION: Rigid closed cell expanded polystyrene beads

2-5/8" thick molded board (Perlite over and under)

2 SPECIFICATION
a. FS HH I 00530, Type II, Class 2, self extinguishing
b. FM approved for use over noncombustible deck; Class1 label
c. Density min 1.7 lbs pcf
d. K Factor max 0.16 per ASTM C 177

3 SUPPLIER
a. Apache Foam Prods
b. Celotex
c. Grefco
d. Johns-Manville
e. Philip Carey
f. US Mineral Prods

2C INSULATION BOARD TOP AND BOTTOM

1 BRIEF DESCRIPTION: Perlite (expanded volcanic glass) and fiber

molded with filler and water resistant binder to rigid incombustible
board with integral skin on top

2 BRAND
a. Celo-therm by Celotex
b. Permalite Sealskin by Grefco
c. Fesco Board by Johns-Manville

3A EXECUTION

a. Stagger board in parallel course with joint tight or filled

b. Adhere per supplier's instruction
c. If contract not tight add mechanical fastening in field
d. Fasten mechanically at perimeter per FM Class1 construction
e. Option mechanical fastening thruout
f. Water cutoff at workday end; remove for next work

3.7.10 Roof Metal 7 RM

1A SINGLE RESPONSIBILITY

Bid this Section with

a. Builtup roofing
b. Roof flashing
c. Roofing insulation

1B STANDARD

SMACNA manual govern detail not shown

1C WARRANTY

Warranty for 2 years against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in

appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect includes
a. Leaking
63-199 6873
5-97
 b. Wrinkling

2A SHEET STEEL

1 GAGE
a. EXPOSED (per max flat width) (if not shown heavier)
26 GAGE: To 3"
24 GAGE: From 3" thru 6"
22 GAGE: From 6" thru 12"
20 GAGE: Over 12"
b. CONCEALED: Min 28
c. HOOKSTRIP (retainer strip) (continuous): Two gages lighter than
retained item
d. ATTACHMENT CLIP: Two gages heavier than retained item

2 FASTENER
a. Cadmium
b. Galvanized hot dip
c. Stainless steel

3 GALVANIZING: ASTM A 93 hot dip total 1.25 oz zinc per sq ft both

faces. Paintgrip by Armco or equal where visible from grade

2B GRAVEL STOP (in scupper)

a. PITCH STOP: 3/4x3" angle, on top of base sheet

b. STOP HEIGHT: 1"
c. ROOF FLANGE: 4"
d. NAILING: 1" roofing nail at 3", back 1" from side
e. INSTALLATION: Bed flange fully in roofing cement
f. LENGTH: Max 10 ft per piece
g. FACE OR SOFFIT NAILING: Not permitted
h. LOOSE EDGE: Seam at least 1/4"
I. FACE HEIGHT: Lap wall material min 1-1/2"
j. LAP: Telescope min 3" except at hookstrip; bed with roof cement

2C GRAVEL STOP JOINT

a. ALIGNMENT: Lap 3" minimum; telescope pieces together except at

continuous hook strip
b. SEALING: Bed lap fully in roofing cement

2D COUNTERFLASHING

a. LENGTH: Piece max 10 ft

b. LOOSE EDGE: Seam min 1/4"
c. JOINTS: Lap 3"; telescope together

2E REGLET

1 TYPE: Permanent installation, metal counterflashing retained by

snapping in place. Removable without damage to flashing or reglet

2 MATERIAL: .055" extruded aluminum; .018" stainless steel; 26 gage

galvanized

3 INSTALLATION: Surface or embedded

4 BRAND
a. Springlock by Fry Reglet Corp
b. Cushion-Lock by Superior Concrete Association
64-199 6873
5-97
 c. Watertite by O'Keefe's Inc
d. Flash-Lock by Flash-Lock

2F PITCH POCKET

a. REQUIRED: For roof penetration or attachment not otherwise

flashed
b. SIZE: 2" high; 4" flange
c. DESIGN: Seam top edge; bottom open; solder edge
d. INSTALLATION: Plastic cement seal under and over low melt
bitumen. Bed flange in cement. Mop 2 strips over flange

2G COMPATIBILITY

a. If possible provide compatible material and fastening in contact

b. Isolate incompatible material to prevent electrolysis

3A INSTALLATION

a. Coordinate with roofing operation

b. Prim flange and other material in contact with roofing membrane
c. Bed sheet metal flange to roof membrane with roofing cement

3.7.11 Roofing Prefinished 7 RP

1A DESCRIPTION

Prefinished galvanized sheet steel standing seam roofing

1B WARRANTY

Warrant for 2 years against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in

appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defects include
a. Leaking
b. Wrinkling
c. Deterioration of prefinish

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Sample

1D STANDARD

SMACNA manual governs detail not shown

2A PANEL

a. BRAND: Tee-Panel by Berridge (Exterior wall panel same)

b. MATERIAL: Hot dip galvanized sheet steel
c. PREFINISH: Color as selected from standard
d. ACCESSORY: Concealed where possible; match panel if visible
e. LOAD: Min 25 pcf positive and negative
f. SEAM: No cross seam at less than 10 ft; stagger if seaming
necessary. Ridge and valley seams member

2B MOISTURE BARRIER (slip sheet)

Moistop by St Regis or equal

3A INSTALLATION
65-199 6873
5-97
 a. POSITIONING: Place appropriately level, plums and at right
angle to adjacent work
b. FITTING: If field cutting or trimming necessary cut or neat and
accurate fit without damage to product or adjacent work
c. ANCHORAGE: Use fastening recommended by supplier. Attach
securely

4A RIDGE VENT

Integrate; provide shop drawings to approval

3.7.12 Waterproofing Membrane 7 WM

1A WARRANTY

Warranty for 2 years against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in

appearance because defective or nonconforming. Correct if faulty Work
causes injurious result like
a. Leaking into building or construction
b. Blistering, tearing, other Work failure

1B OPTION

Contractor may use any specified system

2A BUILT UP SYSTEM MATERIAL

a. GLASS FABRIC: ASTM D 1668; FS HH C 466B; 20x10 thread count,

coated
b. INORGANIC FELT: ASTM D 250, asphalt saturated, 15 felt
c. PRIMER: ASTM D 41, FS SS A 701, or FS SS A 00701A,
waterproofing grade primer
d. ASPHALT: ASTM D 449 71 or FS A 666D, Class A, hot applied
e. CUTBACK ASPHALT, MASTIC AND SEMI MASTIC: ASTM D 2882, D 2823,
FS SS A 694D, FS SS C 153B, Type I, Class B; fibered, suitable for
spray, trowel or brush application, petroleum solvent type, cold
applied

2B PROTECTION BOARD

1/8" thick about 75 lbs per 100 sq ft; homogenous core of asphalt and
stabilizer sandwiched between 2 layers of asphalt saturated, surface
coated felt sealed by heat and pressure

2C LIQUID SYSTEM MATERIAL

1 LIQUID
a. BRAND: Gulf-Seal 220 or 220V by Gulf States Asphalt, Houston,
TX or equal
b. COMPOSITION: Petroleum derived asphalt, rubber polymer, solvent
and thixotropic agent
c. PROPERTY: Per manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet

2 STRIPPING
a. GENERAL DESCRIPTION: Synthetic rubber flexible sheet 1/16"
thick
b. TYPES: Neoprene, EPDM or Butyl

2D WATERSTOP (option)

66-199 6873
5-97
 a. Synko-Flex or equal
b. Injecto and Flex 44 System by DJ DeNeff America, Inc

3A COLD APPLIED BUILT UP BITUMINOUS SYSTEM

a. PRIMER: Spray, brush or roll 1/2 gallon per 100 sq ft

b. FIRST PLY: Trowel, brush or spray 3 gallons per 100 sq ft of
cutback asphalt mastic or semimastic. Embed one ply glass fabric;
lap edge 2" min
c. SECOND PLY: Same as first
d. TOP COAT: Trowel, brush or spray 3 gallons per 100 sq ft of
cutback asphalt mastic or semimastic over glass fabric. Total dry
thickness about 3/32"
e. PROTECTION: Embed premolded asphalt board in top coat; fully
adhere to contact surface. Butt joint. Bend around corner

3B HOT APPLIED BUILT UP BITUMINOUS SYSTEM (option for horizontal

surface only)

a. PRIMER: Spray, brush or roll 1/2 gallon per 100 sq ft

b. FIRST PLY: Mop on 15 pounds of asphalt per 100 sq ft and embed
one layer of felt; lap edge min 3"
c. SECOND AND THIRD PLY: Same as first
d. TOP COAT: Mop on 15 lbs of asphalt over felt. Total dry
thickness about 3/16"
e. PROTECTION: Embed premolded asphalt board in top coat; fully
adhere to contact surface. Butt joint. Bend around corner

3C LIQUID APPLIED SYSTEM

a. CRACK AND NONWORKING JOINT: Strip with 8" min rubber sheet;
fully adhere by rolling in bed of waterproofing
b. INSIDE CORNER (Without cove): Same
c. WORKING JOINT: See Drawings. If not detailed follow
manufacturer's instruction
d. MEMBRANE APPLICATION: Omit primer. Apply 60 mil membrane
compound over joint and surface to be waterproof
e. PROTECTION BOARD: Apply to tacky membrane

3D OMISSION OF PROTECTION BOARD

3.8 DOOR, GLASS & WINDOW

3.8.1 Door and Frame, Hollow Metal 8 DH

1A STANDARD

a. Standard 106 by Steel Door Institute

b. Commercial Standard 242
c. ANSI/SDI-100
d. ASTM E 152 or National Fire Protection Association 80 (same as
UL, FM)

1B WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Indent, surface defect
b. Skewed installation, warp
67-199 6873
5-97
 c. Improper hardware reinforcement
d. Loosening
e. Rust

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Detailed drawings; correct in time for coordination

b. Do not Work before approval
c. Primer performance affidavit

1D HARDWARE COORDINATION

a. Mortise, reinforce and tap per template

b. Do not drill and tap for surface hardware

1E STORAGE

Raise on skids; protect from wetting

2A SUPPLIER

a. Amweld Bldg Prod

b. Kewanee Corp
c. Overly Mfg
d. Steelcraft Mfg Co

2B PRODUCT CLASS

a. Custom
b. Standard if meet Specification
c. By same supplier throughout project; unless oversize,
nonstandard

2C DOOR

a. SEAM (Contractor's option): Seamless or flush with edge seam

b. FACE GAGE: 20 except 18 gage min with steel stiffener type
c. CONSTRUCTION: Steel stiffener at 6" max, Kraft honeycomb,
polyurethane or mineral core
d. REINFORCEMENT: To industry standard and as recommended by
hardware supplier. Coordinate schedule
e. TOP AND BOTTOM: Watertight metal cap for top of exterior door;
flush bottom closure if required for weatherstrip

2D FRAME

a. STOP: Minimum depth 5/8"

b. THICKNESS: Minimum 16 gage; heavier if required for label or
size
c. TRIM FACE: Weld and grind smooth; or knockdown interlock joint
d. STOP CORNER: Miter or butt to lighttight contact
e. ANCHOR: Suit each job condition. Attach to frame unless shown
loose. Floor anchor unless base anchor required. Jamb anchors 3 to
7'-6" ht; 4 if 7'-6" to 9 ft; each 2 ft higher
f. MORTAR GUARD: Min 26 gage
g. REINFORCEMENT: To industry standard and as recommended by
hardware supplier. Include frame spreader. Coordinate schedule
h. SILENCER: Prepare for 3 per single door, 4 per double door;
GJ64 or equal. Lock strike set out to allow for silencer

68-199 6873
5-97
2E FINISH

1 SHOP PRIME

a. TYPE: Rust inhibiting

b. PREPARATION: Bonderize or equal per FS TT C 490 or ANSI A 224.1
c. PERFORMANCE: ASTM B 117
d. LOCATION: Throughout project unless scheduled for omission

2 GALVANIZE
a. TYPE: ASTM A 525 and 526
b. TOUCHUP: Zinc rich primer to equal corrosion resistance
c. PRIMER PREPARATION: Bonderize or equal per FS TT C 490
d. LOCATION: Exterior and as shown; both faces and throughout
assembly

2F FIRE RATING

a. LABEL: By Underwriters' Laboratories with specified hardware

b. CODE: Per local ordinance, governing authority

3A INSTALLATION

1 Plumb, true, plane, at right angles to adjacent Work

2 Secure; anchor frame at each jamb using temporary spreader at

midpoint; two floor anchors each jamb

3 Touchup damaged primer for field painting under other Section

4 Coordinate hardware installation; adjust to smooth quite operation;

latch and lock firmly without forcing or racking

5 Fill jamb as required; nonleaking; fill governed by topping and

grout Section

3.8.2 Door, Plastic Laminate Faced 8 DP

1A STANDARD

a. NWMA 1.S1
b. AWI
c. CS 171
d. FS LLL D 581

1B WARRANTY

Warrant Work for on year against becoming unserviceable or objectionable

in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect includes
a. Releasing from substrate
b. Warp over 1/4" or to interfere with smooth operation
c. Interior show through on face

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Sample of plastic laminate on substrate, finished edge, louver,
molding as required

1D TRANSPORT, HANDLING, STORAGE

a. Pack in heavy cardboard taped

69-199 6873
5-97
 b. Handle to avoid damage, disfiguring, deterioration
c. Store dry, stacked per supplier's instruction

2A SUPPLIER

Ragland Mfg Co Inc or equal

2B DOOR CONSTRUCTION

1 CORE TYPE (Solid)

a. Wood block or stave (plain, framed or stile and rail)
b. Particleboard Type 1, Density C (Avg 30 lb) Class 1 per CS 236
66
c. Mineral Composition; fire rated only

2 GLUE TYPE (interior): Water resistant Type II

3 NUMBER OF PLIES: Min 5 if block or stave core; 3 if particleboard

core

4 CROSSBANDING: Hardwood

5 EDGEBAND (seal at plant)

a. Close grain hardwood one piece
b. Light color if plastic selection is wood grain

6 HOLLOW CORE (where scheduled)

a. QUALITY: Standard by Ragland or equal
b. CORE: Honeycomb resin
c. REINFORCING: Solid wood lockrail and hardware backing

2C PLASTIC LAMINATE

a. MATERIAL: 1/16" NEMA LD1

b. BRANDS: Micarta, Nevamar, Pioneer, Wilsonart
c. SELECTION: Woodgrain, solid, patterned; no embossed
d. RANGE: Max 4 colors; some doors may be different each face

2D AUXILIARY (if shown)

1 CUTOUT
a. At factory, for glazing and louver
b. Provide retaining mold; wood finished to match, blend or
contrast as approved

2 LOUVER
a. Hardwood; blade min 3/8" thick
b. Finish to match, blend or contrast as approved

3A PREPARATION

Coordinate hardware; verify mortise, mill cut

3B EXECUTION

1 INSTALLATION: With finish hardware, under finish carpentry Section

2 ADJUST: To smooth quiet operation; latch and lock firmly without

forcing or racking

3 CLEARANCE:
70-199 6873
5-97
 A. COORDINATE: Threshold and weatherstrip Section and carpet
Section for seals
b. HEAD AND JAMB: Max 1/8"
c. SILL: Tolerance 1/8" up or down from 1/4" typical; snug for
sound seal, as shown for carpet

3.8.3 Frame, Aluminum 8 FA

1A BRIEF DESCRIPTION

Factory finished door frame and glazing system

1B WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Noticeable finish deterioration
b. Loose part or installation

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Descriptive brochure
b. Shop drawings
c. Sample finish
d. Sample extrusion corner

2A SUPPLIER

Ragland Mfg Co Inc or equal

2B DETAIL

a. HARDWARE PREPARATION: Cutout and reinforce for mortised

hardware. Reinforce for surface mounted hardware. Minimum aluminum
reinforcing thickness 1/8"
b. CONCEALED FASTENING: Except flush screw permitted in web member
of borrowed light frame
c. WEATHERSTRIP: Continuous plastic gasket or pile
d. EXCESS LENGTH: If frame to ceiling, minimum 1" extra length at
bottom for field cut
e. HINGE NUMBER: 2, 3 or 4 as specified under Hardware

2C PREFINISH

Duralaq or equal as selected from standard

4A PARTITION TRIM (where shown)

Complete aluminum to match door frame. Include top cap, end cap, cased
opening, borrowed light frame, glazing accessory

3.8.4 Glazing 8 G

1A PRECEDENCE

This Section govern glazing throughout Work

1B STANDARD

71-199 6873
5-97
 1 Local Code

2 Flat Glass Marketing Association Manual for glazing and sealant

3 FEDERAL
a. ANSI 58.1: Wind
b. FS DD G 451D: Float Q3; mirror Q2

1C WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Leaking
b. Breaking because of faulty Work

1D SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Sample except clear

2A GLASS SUPPLIER

a. American Saint Gobain

b. Combustion Engineering
c. Libby Owens Ford
d. Pittsburgh Plate Glass

2B LABEL

a. Deliver and install with label intact

b. Remove label at Substantial Completion
c. Tempered or laminated safety glass mark permanent

2C SETTING BLOCK

a. REQUIREMENT: For glass over 1/8" thick; light over 6 sq ft

b. MATERIAL: Neoprene; 70 to 90 shore A durometer hardness
c. SIZE: Min 1/8" thick; length proper for load
d. LOCATION: Quarter point of fixed light at sill

2D TAPE

1 EXTERIOR BRAND
a. 440 by Tremco
b. BB50 by Pecora
c. PTI 606 by Protective Treatments Inc

2 INTERIOR BRAND
a. 530 by Norton or equal
b. 550 by Norton or equal

2E ACRYLIC SHEET

Not used

2F POLYCARBONATE SHEET

Not used

72-199 6873
5-97
3A PREEXAMINATION

Verify setting plumb and in plane sufficiently perfect that distortion

not noticeable at any angle. Eliminate grit to prevent stress crack

3B EXTERIOR INSTALLATION

1 AMBIENT CONDITION
a. Min 408F
b. Frost free

2 GLASS CENTERING: Space perimeter equal throughout

3 TAPE OR GASKET (per system)

a. Joint at corner only
b. Compressed at joint
c. Sealant nonskinning, watertight

3C INTERIOR INSTALLATION

SETTING HOLLOW METAL, WOOD

a. FOAM TAPE: Both faces

b. THICKNESS: Min 15% compression

3D SPECIAL PRODUCTION INSTALLATION

Per supplier's recommendation and instruction

4A SAFETY GLASS LOCATION (In addition to location shown)

a. Door
b. Light over 9 sq ft

4B UNFRAMED MIRROR

1 MATERIAL
a. GLASS: Plate or float; 1/4" clear, tempered
b. SILVERING: Electroplated copper backing with paint protection
c. GUARANTEE: 5 years against silver deterioration
d. EDGE: Ease and polish

2 INSTALLATION
a. MIRROR BACKPRIME: Assure coverage at mastic spot
b. WALL SEALER: Entire surface
c. MASTIC: 6" diameter spots covering 35% of area
d. SETTING BLOCK: At quarter point
e. CLAMP: 277 Knape & Vogt bottom; 278 top; 3/8" size

4C GLASS TYPE

1 EXTERIOR
a. Mirror bronze tint 1/4" thick
b. Fully tempered

2 INTERIOR
a. Clear 1/4" thick
b. Fully tempered, except laminated in door

73-199 6873
5-97
3.8.5 Finish Hardware 8 HW

1A GENERAL

1 Work not included

2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. QUALIFICATIONS:
SUPPLIER: Subcontract the furnishing of hardware only to a
recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been furnishing
hardware for not less than 2 years, and who has in his employment
an experienced hardware consultant who is available at all
reasonable times during the course of the work, for project
hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect and Contractor
INSTALLER: Assign the installation of hardware to experienced
tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdiction; either at
the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site, at
Contractor's option except as otherwise indicated. It is assumed
that the carpentry trade will install hardware items, except as
otherwise required by the manufacturer, or otherwise directed by
the Contractor, or otherwise specified
MANUFACTURER: To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind
of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) From
only the manufacturer, even though several are indicated as
acceptable manufacturers
b. SCHEDULED MATERIAL AND MANUFACTURER DESIGNATIONS: The numeric
destination system in the Schedule establishes acceptable design,
size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance
which may be furnished by any manufacturer listed for that item
under "Materials"
c. FIRE-RATED OPENINGS: Provide hardware for fire- rated openings
in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80. This requirement takes
precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide
only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the
types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the
requirements of the door and door frame labels
d. WHERE EXIT DEVICES are required on fire-rated doors, provide UL
label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware"
e. TEMPLATES: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of
doors, frames and other work to be factory-pre-prepared for the
installation of hardware
f. HAND OF DOOR: The Drawings show the swing or hand of each door
leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of
hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing
as shown

3 FINAL HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Submit 5 copies of the hardware schedule which shall be organized
into "hardware sets" and "groups"), indicating complete designation
of every item required for each door or opening. Include with final
drafter a separate key schedule, showing clearly how the Owner's
final instructions of keying of locks have been fulfilled. Review
and acceptance of schedule by Architect does not relieve Contractor
of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown
and specified

4 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
Submit manufacturer's data for each item of hardware, with hardware
schedule. Include whatever information may be necessary to show
compliance with requirements, and include instructions for

74-199 6873
5-97
 installation and for maintenance of operating parts and exposed
finishes

5 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND ADJUSTING TOOLS

Prior to project completion furnish and deliver to the Architect:
A. A booklet composed of all literature concerning the installation
and adjustments of all hardware to be installed in the building.
The instruction pamphlets shall be assembled in a hard covered
binder, labeled on the front "Maintenance Manual for Finish
Hardware"
B. Two sets of all wrenches, adjustment tools, etc., for proper
maintenance of hardware to be installed in the building

6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. COORDINATION: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each
item or package separately, with identification related to the final
hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in
the package
B. DELIVERY: Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the
times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as
directed by Contractor

2A PRODUCTS

1 MATERIALS
a. MANUFACTURERS: Provide hardware produced by one of the
following manufacturers in each category: (Manufacturers underlined
are the one specified under hardware sets)

(1) HINGES:
Hager
Stanley
McKinney

(2) LOCKS, LATCHES, DEADLOCKS AND COMBINATIONS:

Yale
Corbin/Russwin
Sargent
a) Designs - Augusta
b) Lock Series - 5400LN

Comply with UL requirements for throw of lat bolts on rated fire

operations:

(3) FLUSH BOLTS, AUTOMATIC FLUSH BOLTS:

Trimco
HB Ives
Rockwood
Glynn Johnson
Quality

(4) EXIT DEVICES:

Yale
Corbin/Russwin
Von Duprin

(5) CLOSERS:
Yale
Norton
LCN

75-199 6873
5-97
 (6) STOPS, BUMPERS, FLOOR/WALL HOLDERS AND MISCELLANEOUS:
Trimco
HB Ives
Quality
Trego

(7) PUSH, PULL ,KICKPLATES, MOPPLATES, ARMOUR PLATES:

Trego
Burns
Quality
HB Ives

(8) THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING:

National Guard
Reese
Pemko
Zero

(9) SILENCERS:
Trimco
Glynn Johnson
Quality

(10) KEY CABINET:

Key Control Systems Inc
Tel-Kee
Lund

2B LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING

1 STANDARD SYSTEM: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new

masterkey system for this project

2 Equip all locks with manufacturer's special 6-pin tumbler cylinder,

with construction master key feature, which permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal

3 Comply with the Owner's instructions for grandmaster/masterkeying

and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key
for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group
of related locks

4 KEY QUALITY: Furnish 2 keys for each lock, 6 keys for each key
alike group, 5 keys for each master (including construction master)
and grandmaster system. Stamp all keys with set number. Identify
masterkeys as such and stamp "DO NOT DUPLICATE". Hardware supplier
shall deliver masterkeys directly to Architect in sealed package, by
registered mail

3A FASTENERS

Provide Phillips flat-head screws for installation with each hardware

item. Base metal of fasteners shall be compatible with both hardware
and substrate. Finish exposed screws to match hardware finish, or if
exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other
work. Fasteners shall be concealed in hardware units which are exposed
when the door is exposed, except to the extent no standard manufactured
units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners

76-199 6873
5-97
4A MATERIAL AND FINISH

All hardware shall be steel, brass, bronze, or stainless steel, finished

dull chrome (US26D) for brass and bronze material and US3/LM 8 2D for
stainless steel

5A EXECUTION

1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
Prior to installation of hardware at the project site, conduct a
general orientation meeting attended by the hardware installers,
hardware suppliers, manufacturers' technical representatives,
Architects, Owners' representative and Contractor. Compare the
supplied hardware items with the accepted samples of finishes and
designs with the accepted samples of finishes and designs (if any).
Review the installation procedures related to the schedules of
hardware, doors and frames. Establish final provisions related to
security and key control. Examine hardware items for unusual
provisions including special operational features, security devices,
UL labels and similar considerations related to installation

2 HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended
Locations for Builders Hardware" by Door & Hardware Institute and
ADA requirements except as otherwise specifically indicated or
required to comply

3 INSTALLATION
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is
required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later
to be painted or finished in another way, install each item
completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the
finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall
each item. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes
have been completed on the substrate

4 ADJUST AND CHECK

a. ADJUST AND CHECK each operating item of hardware and each door,
to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate
moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer
(graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units which
cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly
as intended for the application made
b. FINAL ADJUSTMENT: Wherever hardware installation is made more
than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or
area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean and relubricate operating
items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of
hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate
for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment
c. INSTRUCT OWNER'S PERSONNEL in proper adjustment and maintenance
of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of
hardware

5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Finish hardware by sets

77-199 6873
5-97
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

HW SET 1

Doors 1, 3

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1199 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xNRPxUS32D

1 ea Exit Device - Yale 7200MxAU506FxUS32DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3521xSNBxSB
1 set Weatherstripping - NGP 172NA (Head & Jambs)
1 ea Automatic Door Bottom - NGP 320S
1 ea Assembled Threshold - NGP
2/8139x2/8144x8143x2/1/8"x3/4" Bar Stock
Supports x Aluminum

HW SET 2

Door 2

Each Pair Doors provided with :

6 ea Hinges - Hager BB1199 4-1/2"x4-1/2"XNRPxUS32D

1 ea Lockset - Yale PB5405LNx497xUS26DxMK (Active Leaf)
2 ea Flush Bolts - Trimco 3917x12"xUS26D (Inactive
Leaf)
1 ea Dust Proof Strike - Trimco 3910 NFPxUS26D
2 ea Closer/Holder - Yale 3521-TxSNBxSB (1108)
1 set Weatherstripping - NGP 172NA (Head & Jambs)
2 ea Automatic Door Bottoms - NGP 320S
1 set Astragals - NGP 600A
1 ea Assembled Threshold - NGP
2/8139x2/8144x8143x2/1/8"x3/4" Bar Stock
Supports x Aluminum

HW SET 3

Door 5

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5405LNx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501xSNBxSB
1 ea Stop - Trimco 1201MSxESxUS26D
1 set Perimeter Seals - NGP 133NA (Head & Jambs)
1 ea Drop Door Seal - NGP 310NA

HW SET 4

Doors 6, 7, 16, 17

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Privacy Lock - Yale AU5402NLx497xUS26D
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501BFxSNBxSB
1 ea Closer/Stop - Yale 3521BFxSNBxSB (Door 7)
1 ea Stop - Trimco 1274CCSxUS26D (Doors 6, 14, 15)
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A
78-199 6873
5-97
HW SET 5

Doors 8, 9

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5405NLx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer/Stop - Yale 3521xSNBxSB
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 6

Doors 10, 19

Each Pair Doors provided with:

6 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5405NLx497xUS26DxMK (Active Leaf)

2 ea Flush Bolts - Trimco 3917x12"xUS26D (Inactive

Leaf)
1 ea Dust Proof Strike - Trimco 3910xUS26D
1 ea Door Closer - Yale PA3501xSNBxSB (180) (Active
Leaf)
2 ea Stops - Trimco 1274CCSxUS26D
2 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 7

Door 11

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xNRPxUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5405NLx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3521xSNBxSB
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 8

Door 12

Each Pair Doors provided with:

6 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5407LNx497xUS26DxMK (Active Leaf)
1 ea Dummy Trim - Yale AU5401LN (Less Latch & Strike) x
US26D (Inactive Leaf)
2 ea Flush Bolts - Trimco 3917x12"xUS26D (Inactive
Leaf)
2 ea Closer/Holder - Yale 3521TxSNBxSB
2 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A
2 ea Stop - Trimco 1210MSxESxUS26D

HW SET 9

Door 18

Each Door provided with:

79-199 6873
5-97
3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D
1 ea Deadlock - Yale 313STxUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501BFxSNBxSB
1 ea Push Plate - Trego OP-1600xUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Pull Plate - Trego PP605xP163xUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Kickplate - Trego 8"x34"x.050"xB3ExUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Door Stop - Trimco 1210 MSxES
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 10

Door 20, 21, 22

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5400LNx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Stop - Trimco 1274CCSxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 11

Door 13, 14, 22, 23, 24

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5407NLx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3511xSNBxSB
1 ea Stop - Trimco 1274CCSxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 12

1 ea Key Cabinet - Key Control System, Inc M256-PLR

MAINTENANCE BUILDING

HW SET 1

Doors 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 13

Each Door provided with:

1 ea Rim or Mortise Cylinder as required - Yale 1109

or 1152xUS26DxMK

BALANCE OF HARDWARE FURNISHED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER

HW SET 2

Doors 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1191 4-1/2x4-1/2"xNRPxUS3/LM 8 2D

1 ea Exit Device - Yale 7100xAU526FxUS32DxMK
1 ea Door Closer/Stop - Yale 3521xSNBxSB
1 set Weatherstripping - National Guard Products 172NA
(Head & Jamb)
80-199 6873
5-97
1 ea Door Sweep - National Guard Products 101VA
1 ea Threshold - NGP 613AxS/S - MS/LA
1 ea Drip Cap - NGP 16AD

HW SET 3

Door 14, 15, 22, 23, 29

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5407LNx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501xSNBxSB
1 ea Stop - Trimco 1201MSxESxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 4

Door 16, 17

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Deadlock - Yale 313STxUS26DxMK
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501BFxSNBxSB
1 ea Push Plate - Trego OP-1600xUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Pull Plate - Trego PP-605xPO-163xUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Kickplate - Trego 8"x34"x.050"xB3ExUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Door Stop - Trimco 1210 MSxESxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 5

Door 18, 19, 26, 27

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5407LNx497xUS26DxMK
1 ea Door Stop - Trimco 1210 MSxESxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 6

Doors 20

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Exit Device - Yale 7100FxAU526FxUS3/LM 8 2D
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501xSNBxSB
1 ea Door Stop - Trimco 1201MSxESxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 7

Doors 21, 28

Each Pair Doors provided with:

6 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xUS26D

81-199 6873
5-97
 1 ea Lockset - Yale AU5407LNxUS26D (Active Leaf)
2 ea Flush Bolts - Trimco 3917x12"US26D (Inactive Leaf)
1 ea Dust Proof Strike - Trimco 3910xUS26D
1 ea Closer - Yale 3501xSNBxSB (Active Leaf)
2 ea Door Stops - Trimco 1201MSxESxUS26D
2 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 8

Doors 24, 25

Each Door provided with:

3 ea Hinges - Hager BB1279 4-1/2"x4-1/2"xUS26D

1 ea Privacy Lock - Yale AU5402LNx497xUS26D
1 ea Closer - Yale PA-3501BFxSNBxSB (Door 24)
1 ea Closer - Yale 3521BFxSNBxSBx110" (Door 25)
1 ea Stop - Trimco 1201MSxESxUS26D
3 ea Silencers - Trimco 1229A

HW SET 9

Wire Gates

3 ea Padlocks - Yale 850-1/2xMK

HW SET 10

1 ea Key Cabinet - Key Control Systems Inc M256PLR

3.8.6 Hardware and Weatherstripping 8 HW

1A WORK UNDER OTHER SECTION (except cylinder)

a. Cabinet Hardware
b. Special opening hardware, weatherstrip

1B WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Faulty or inadequate design
b. Improper fabrication or assembly
c. Finish deterioration

1C SCHEDULE

Bound in following

1D SUBMITTAL

a. SCHEDULE:: Mark door number from Drawings; set number; catalog

by supplier; item quantity
b. CATALOG BROCHURE: Proposed item
c. SAMPLE: Prefinish

1E TEMPLATE

Promptly send data for approved hardware to door supplier

82-199 6873
5-97
2A HARDWARE

1 PACKING AND MARKING: Package each item separately, complete with

necessary screw, key, template and installation instruction. Mark
each package with item number corresponding to item number in
hardware schedule

2 CYLINDER: Per Finish Hardware Specification requirement?

3A EXECUTION

a. INSTALLATION: To manufacturer's template and instruction

b. ADJUSTMENT: To smooth quiet operation; snug but nonbinding

4A WEATHERSTRIP, THRESHOLD

See Drawings for condition, requirement

3.8.7 Special Opening, Upward Acting Sectional Steel 8 SU

1A RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

a. Mounting, frame
b. Field finishing

2A BRAND

1 No. 920 by Able Door Company or equal product by

a. Raynor
b. Overhead Door Corp
c. Windsor

2 Provide timely shop drawings

2B DOOR (for headroom see Drawings; Max High Lift)

1 MATERIAL
a. STEEL: 20 gage galvanized steel; primed
b. GALVANIZING: 1.25 oz zinc pcf; ASTM C 525

1 FINISH
a. Clean and pretreat with zinc phosphate conversion coat
b. Preprime both sides of door face after forming

3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY

a. FINISH: Galvanize or cadmium plate
b. ROLLER: 3" ballbearing
c. CABLE: Galvanized aircraft type; 8:1 safety factor
d. OPENING FROM EXTERIOR: None

4 TORSION SPRING
Standard

5 LOAD
a. WIND: 20 psf
b. DEFLECTION: 1/120 width

2C TRACK

a. MATERIAL: Galvanized
83-199 6873
5-97
 b. SIZE: 3"

2D OPERATION

a. ELECTRIC OPERATOR: 1/2 HP motor with safety operation switches

b. MANUAL: Chain hoist (emergency)
c. LOCKING: See Hardware Schedule
d. SAFETY: Photoelectric eye for automatic opening applications

3.8.8 Window, Aluminum 8 WA

1A SUBMITTAL

Shop drawings with copies and prints as directed.

Start Work only after approval

2A TYPE

Fixed light

2B CONSTRUCTION

a. ALLOY: Aluminum
b. ACCESSORY, FASTENING: Compatible; finish to match if exposed
c. GLAZING: Gasket system; tempered 1/4"
d. FINISH: Clear anodize

2C BRAND

PPG Azurlite, or equal

2D SIZE, CONFIGURATION

See Drawings

3.9 FINISH

3.9.1 Acoustic Ceiling 9 AC

1A SUBMITTAL

a. PRODUCT DATA: Suspension system

b. SAMPLE: Acoustic board, each type

2A EXPOSED GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM

1 SUPPLIER
a. Acoustical board supplier
b. Chicago Metallic
c. Donn Products
d. Eastern Products
e. National Rolling Mills

2 GRID MEMBER

a. MAIN AND CROSS RUNNER: Steel tee; min 7/8" face and 1-1/2"
depth
b. WALL MOLDING: Angle type; 1" face
84-199 6873
5-97
 c. MATERIAL: Min 25 gage; electro galvanize
d. FINISH: Matte white enamel

3 HANGER WIRE: 12 galvanized wire at 4 feet on main runner

2B ACOUSTICAL BOARD

1 SUPPLIER
a. Armstrong
b. Celotex
c. USG

2 UNIT
a. TYPE: Felted mineral fiber board
b. PATTERN: Fissured, perforated or textured as selected
c. SIZE: 5/8" thick; length and width as shown
d. SOUND ABSORPTION: Min NRC 50 to 60
e. SOUND ATTENUATION: Min STC 35 to 39
f. FLAME RESISTANCE: Class 25 incombustible per FS SS S 118B
g. FINISH: Painted white; min 75% reflectance for medium texture

3A REEXAMINATION

Work onsite only if conditions suitable for approved execution

3B LAYOUT

Follow reflected ceiling plan on Drawings. If conflict between

Sections, request instruction before proceeding

3C LEVELING

1 If ceiling conditions permit, accurately level support finish

surface

2 If specific floor to ceiling dimension, or if ceiling conditions

restrict, request instruction before proceeding. If ceiling warp
necessary, change gradually to prevent distortion noticeable from
eye level

4A FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY

Ceiling system UL fire rated with related construction; provide fixture

enclosure and holddown clip to achieve UL rating 2 hour for
ceiling/floor, 1 hour for ceiling/roof

3.9.2 Carpeting 9 C

1A ALLOWANCE

Purchase and deliver direct gluedown carpet under Allowance in Abstract

of Work, Division 1

2A ACCESSORY

Provide Lees Texloc adhesive and edge sealer, vinyl binder and other
accessory of standard quality as recommended by manufacturer for first
class installation

3A PREPARATION

85-199 6873
5-97
Repair minor floor irregularity; clean floor of dust, grit, debris

3B LAYING

a. Store product at min 708F for min 24 hours before laying;

ambient temperature above 708F while laying
b. Butter raw edge with edge sealer before closing seam
c. Lines in carpet parallel and perpendicular to wall
d. Neatly trim to snug fit
e. Cut on job; cut under door so carpet edge at centerline of
closed door
f. Allow minimum number of seams. Do not lay seam perpendicular to
opening
g. Tufting in one direction
h. Roll to supplier's recommendation; psi to max contact free from
ripple and pucker

3C COMPLETION

a. Remove dirt and debris

b. Protect traffic area by cover
c. Before removal of leftover Owner will select for future repair

3.9.3 Flooring, Resilient 9 FR

1A WARRANTY

One year against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in appearance

because defective or nonconforming. Defect includes
a. Warping
b. Buckling
c. Shrinking
d. Cracking
e. Softening
f. Discoloring
g. Delaminating

1B SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Sample, timely for approval
c. Installation instruction for Project condition

2A SUPPLIER

a. Armstrong
b. Azrock
c. Kentile

2B VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

a. SPECIFICATION: FS SS T 31/LM 8 2B IV modified to 40 lb indent

test
b. SIZE: 12"x12"x1/8"
c. PATTERN, COLOR: As selected from architectural series;
homogeneous; smooth surface

2C RESILIENT BASE

a. MATERIAL: Vinyl or rubber

b. TYPE: Topset cover; 48" length or in roll; as shown at carpet
86-199 6873
5-97
 c. THICKNESS: 0.125"
d. OUTSIDE CORNER: Premolded
e. BRAND: Same as floor tile, or Burke, Robbins or Roppe
f. COLOR: As selected from standard except white
g. HEIGHT: 4"

2D ACCESSORY

a. TILE ADHESIVE: Same brand as tile; cutback asphalt type;

SS A 128
b. BASE ADHESIVE: By base supplier, installed per his
recommendation
c. TAPERED STRIP: To cement floor unless saddle shown

3A PREPARATION

a. Spot patch chip

b. Level with latex underlayment

3B TILE INSTALLATION

a. Arrange tile so that row at wall is larger than half size

b. No boarder, feature strip or special design
c. Run directional pattern tile one direction throughout project
d. Roll with 150 lb roller to level and 100% bond

3C BASE INSTALLATION

a. Butt to hairline fit; recut if required; joint in compression

b. Base press floor; continuous closure
c. Cove base at carpet only after carpet in place
d. Provide base at cabinet if shown

3D PROTECTION

Cover traffic area during construction; damager make good

3E SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Wash and wax; immaculate and polished to approval

3.9.4 Gypsum Drywall 9 GD

1A STANDARD

a. ANSI A 97.1 and 2

b. Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Board by Gypsum Association
c. ASTM C 754

1B SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Shop drawing for special condition
c. Installation instruction by supplier to Contractor

1C HANDLING

a. Deliver in original labeled container

b. Store stacked, protected from stress, impact, weather and sun

87-199 6873
5-97
1D DESIGN LOAD

Max deflection 1/240 span for normal load 5 psf horizontal

2A SUPPLIER

Member of Gypsum Association

2B GYPSUM BOARD (See Drawings for location, thickness)

a. WALLBOARD (typically exposed or smooth substrate): ASTM C 36

b. BACKING BOARD (typically covered or rough substrate): ASTM C
442
c. WATER RESISTANT BACKING BOARD (high humidity area): ASTM C 630
d. TYPE X (special fire retardant): As standardized in above types

2C ATTACHMENT (per standard, design and supplier's recommendation)

a. NAIL: ASTM C 514

b. SCREW: To steel ASTM C 646 Type S, Type S12 to structural; to
wood ASTM C 804 Type W; to gypsum board ASTM C 893 Type G
c. ADHESIVE: To wood ASTM C 557; to steel and gypsum board as
recommended by supplier for project condition
d. WIRE, STAPLE (if required): Galvanized; size per standard

2D FRAMING

a. WOOD: American Lumber Standards Specifications

b. NONBEARING STEEL: Stud, runner, furring channel ASTM C 645

2E SOUND ATTENUATION

a. MATERIAL: Mineral fiber, glass fiber

b. FIRE RATING: Flame spread 15; fuel contributed 0; smoke
generated 0
c. STANDARD: FS HH 1 521E, Type 1, ASTM C 665
d. DENSITY: 4 lb/cu ft
e. THICKNESS: See Drawings. If not shown; fill stud space

2F ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

a. SUPPLIER: Tremco Mfg Co or equal

b. TYPE: Non drying, non skinning, non staining, resilient
synthetic rubber
c. SIZE: Bead about 3/8" diam; in groove fill width to 1/2"

2G EXPANSION JOINT

a. TYPE: W per standard

b. SPACING: As shown, per standard if not shown

2H PARTITION DESIGN

1 DEFLECTION: Max 1/240 span at 5 psf normal horizontal

2 CLOSURE: Seal lighttight around structural member and to structure

above
a. Floor penetration shaft, chase
b. Mechanical and toilet space
c. Corridor wall
d. As shown
88-199 6873
5-97
2I MEMBER SIZE AND FINISH (if not shown)

a. SCREW STUD: Flange min 11/16"; hem 1/4"; min 25 gage; hot dip
galvanize
b. RUNNER: Flange min 1-1/4"; min 25 gage; hot dip galvanize
c. FURRING CHANNEL: Min 2-1/2x3/8x7/8" deep; hem std; min 25 gage;
electrogalvanize
d. RUNNER CHANNEL OR ANGLE: Min 1-3/8x7/8", min 22 gage; hot dip
galvanize
e. RUNNER CHANNEL (heavy duty): 1-1/2x7/16"; 16 gage,; 175 lb per
1000 ft; protective paint
f. WIRE: Galvanize per FS QQ W 64/LM 8 1E Class 1
g. TRIM: Size to board thickness; steel galvanized; cornerbead U,
L, LK and LC; option plastic similar by Geon; standard finish

2J ACCESSORY

a. COMPOUND: Drying and setting supplier's standard. Do not mix.

Assure compatibility with adjoining material
b. TAPE: As recommended by supplier

3A GYPSUM BOARD THICKNESS/FRAMING SPACING/ATTACHMENT/BENDING

Per standard table for minimum requirement; greater if shown

3B SCREW STUD INSTALLATION

a. TRACK: Attach at max 24"; floor concrete nail or shot in:

Staggered fastening, brace at max 4 ft to structure
b. STUD: Per UL Design; at max 24"
c. CORNER: One stud at corner; another at board thickness
distance, screw to spacer gypsum board at 24"
d. DOOR FRAME: Screw stud to frame anchor
e. INTERSECTION: Attach stud with 8 sheet metal screw 3/4" long
to adjoining wall continuous gypsum board at 12"

3C FURRING

a. SPACING: Same as partition stud

b. DIRECTION: Vertical if not shown
c. BRACE: Bracket to rigidity of partition

3D CEILING (suspended) (furring soffit same)

a. RUNNER CHANNEL: Min 1-1/2" at max 4 ft

b. HANGER WIRE: Min 9 at max 4 ft
c. FURRING CHANNEL: At max 24"; attachment by standard clip
d. BOARD ATTACHMENT: Across support by screw at 8" along butt
edge, at 12" elsewhere except at 8" thruout for fire rating.
Stagger and joint. Butt at support

3E TRIM

a. TYPE: Floated flange unless exposed type shown

b. LOCATION: Cover exposed edge; cover edge butting adjacent
construction; where shown. Corner bead at outside corner thuout
except above ceiling or if scheduled for other cover

3F AMBIENT CONDITION

89-199 6873
5-97
No finishing until min 48 hours at min 508F; keep temperature and
maintain ventilation until compound dry and set

3G JOINT

a. FINISH: Float and sand to unnoticeable when painted semigloss

without texture
b. ABOVE CEILING: Tape and fill; omit float and sand

3H WORKMANSHIP (tool per standard)

1 VISIBLE: Correct nick; bump; variation from plane, level or plumb

2 TOLERANCE
a. WALL: Normal max 3/8" any 9 ft; warp, swell or depression max
1/8" any 2 ft
b. CORNER: Out of square max 3/16" any 16"

3 LONG WALL INTERSECTING GLAZED WALL

Keep defect unnoticeable by normal vision at 20 ft and 308 angle

toward light

3I LAMINATION

a. Per fire requirement, UL Design

b. Stagger joint min 10" between layers; 12 or 16" if convenient
c. Base layer full height floor to ceiling for fire and sound rated
construction

3J WORKER PROTECTION

a. Wear approved respirator during mixing and sanding

b. Do not exceed drill speed recommended by compound supplier

3.9.5 Painting 9 P

1A WARRANTY

Warrant for one year against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in

appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defects include
a. Noticeable yellowing, streaking, blooming, color change
b. Mildew, mold
c. Peel, crack, blister, alligator or release from substrate
d. Excessive chalking or dusting
e. Irregular sheen change
f. Softness or tackiness

1B SUBMITTAL

a. Color chip
b. Applied sample of basic color (may remain if approved)

2A SUPPLIER

Sherwin-Williams as specified, or equal product without custom mixing by

a. Celanese
b. Cook Paint and Varnish
c. Glidden
d. Pratt and Lambert

90-199 6873
5-97
2B PRIMER, SEALER, FILLER (in Warranty)

a. As recommended by supplier for substrate and finish

b. Corrosion resistant if metal not galvanized or primed
c. Latex for plaster, cement

2C PAINT QUALITY, TYPE

Standard first line product and result

2D PAINT SHEEN (gloss reading, % at 608F)

a. FLAT: 10 plus or minus 3

b. SATIN: 40 plus or minus 5
c. SEMIGLOSS: 60 plus or minus 5
d. GLOSS: 90 or more

2E COLOR

a. SELECTION: Full standard range; special accent shown

b. SCHEDULE: By Architect and Contractor to approval

3A PREPARATION (Starting Work signifies acceptance of substrate)

a. STEEL: Remove grease, oil, dirt, dust, rust, scale,

contaminant. Clean per Steel Structures Painting Council standard.
Retouch or prime same day
b. WOOD: Smooth; dust clean; sap seal; compatibly fill; dry
c. GYPSUM DRYWALL: Clean and dry. Nail head set and spackled.
Joint taped and floated smooth. Sand smooth. Remove dust
d. PLASTER: Cured, hard, dry

3B PROTECTION

a. Protect other work

b. Replace damage to other work

3C THICKNESS (minimum 2 coat dry film measure)

1 TEST: Tooke Mark II gage measuring V cut or other approved method

2 PRIMER AND FINISH

Dry film thickness as recommended by Supplier for each coat

3D WORKMANSHIP

a. THINNING: Only per supplier's instruction for job condition

b. LEVELING: Apply with proper consistency and touch, so paint
flows free of brush and roller mark, bubble, dust, run, sage and
holiday. Spread evenly
c. APPEARANCE: Uniform color, texture and sheen
d. NEATNESS: Do not smear, spatter or overrun adjoining color or
material. Cut in straight

3E COMPLETE WORK

Paint material, item and area normally included in complete paint job,
except as scheduled for omission. Paint both sides of door and frame
scheduled for field painting

3F MILLWORK PRIMING
91-199 6873
5-97
Promptly after delivery. If grain rise, sand smooth with grain or
replace

3G INSPECTION

1 Verify paint compatibility. If necessary change product or block

coat to segregate incompatibly type

2 Obtain approval just before coat

3H FOLLOWUP (touchup, maintenance, repair)

a. CORROSIVE CONDITION: At 5 months and 11 months

b. NORMAL CONDITION: At 11 months

4A TYPICAL SYSTEMS

See Drawings and color schedule. If surface satisfactorily primed, omit

first coat and substitute touchup coat. Coat number minimum only;
actual number depends upon enough paint for dry thickness, finish
appearance and adhesion

4B EXTERIOR SYSTEM

1 GALVANIZED STEEL (flat)

a. PRIMER: Galvite
b. 2 COATS: ProMar Alkyd

2 CAST IRON (gloss)

a. PRIMER: KemKromik
b. 2 COATS: Metalastic

3 WOOD (satin)
a. PRIMER: A100 Alkyd
b. 2 COATS: A100 Satin Latex

4C INTERIOR SYSTEM

1 DRYWALL (semigloss)
a. PRIMER: ProMar 200 Latex
b. 2 COATS: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel

2 Metal
Same as exterior

3 PLASTER (semigloss)
a. PRIMER: Wall and Wood
b. 2 COATS: ProMar 200 Latex Enamel

4 WOOD (semigloss)
a. PRIMER: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater
b. 2 COATS: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel

4C INCLUSION

1 EXTERIOR
a. Roof metal
b. Cast iron
c. Loose lintel
d. Wood soffit, trim
92-199 6873
5-97
 2 INTERIOR
a. Gypsum drywall
b. Visible metal
c. Plaster
d. Wood

4E EXCLUSION

1 EXTERIOR
a. Facebrick
b. Wood fence
c. Prefinished item

2 INTERIOR
a. Concealed metal
b. Prefinished item

4F OTHER SYSTEM

a. STANDARD: Current specification/application by supplier

b. PRODUCT: By Sherwin-Williams
c. EXECUTION: Per supplier's recommendation and instruction for
specific project condition
d. SYSTEM LOCATION: See Color Schedule by Architect

3.9.6 Plaster on Masonry 9 PM

1A SUBMITTAL

a. Sample
b. Approval before Work

1B STANDARD

ANSI 42.2 exterior

2A SUPPLIER, BRAND

a. Thoro Systems Products, 7800 N. W. 38th Street, Miami, Florida

33166 or approved equal

2B COAT SEQUENCE AND PRODUCT

a. Thoroseal - cement based water-proofing coating - 1 coat

b. Thoroseal Plastermix - waterproof portland cement - 2 coats
c. Thorosheen - water based, acrylic emulsion with 56% solids - 1
coat
d. Acryl 60 - acrylic polmers and modifiers in water based emulsion
for use as an admixture
e. Mixing per manufacturer's directions

3A APPLICATION

a. Fog spray wall with water prior to material application

b. Thoroseal mixed with Acryl 60, sprayed and back broomed on wall
at the rate of 200 square feet per bag, wait 7 days for curing
c. Thoroseal Plaster mixed with Acryl 60, troweled over cured
Thoroseal to the depth of 1/8" (use color gray), wait 3 days for
curing
d. Thoroseal Plaster mixed with Acryl 60, troweled and textured to
93-199 6873
5-97
 the depth of 1/8" (use color white), wait 7 days for curing
e. Thorosheen sprayed on wall to cover and provide dry film mil
thickness of 3.09 or coverage of 200 square feet per gallon by
brush, roller or air- less sprayer followed by roller. Apply second
coat after 2 hours following the same procedure as the first coat,
achieving a continuous film on surface.

4A WARRANTY

Provide extended warranty to owner.

3.9.7 Tile, Ceramic 9 TC

1A SUBMITTAL

a. Tile sample each shop

b. Product data of bonding and grout material
c. Installation instruction for Project condition

1B STANDARD

a. Tile Council of America

b. A108, A118, A136 by ANSI

2A SUPPLIER

a. American Olean Tile

b. Dal-Tile
c. Monarch Tile
d. Summitville Tiles Inc

2B TILE

1 GRADE: Standard Grade, TCA 137.1

2 SHAPE
a. BASE: Cove at floor; square at inside corner except cove mosaic
b. CAP, JAMB, OUTSIDE CORNER: Bullnose
c. INSIDE CORNER: Wall tile square
d. TYPE: Combination field tile with cove or bullnose

2C BONDING AND GROUT GENERAL

Licensed by Tile Council of America, or to ANSI

standard

2D GROUT

a. TYPICAL: Commercial portland cement, dry set, latex portland

cement or mastic; licensed by TCA or to ANSI Standard; mildew
resistant
b. COLOR: Mineral oxide; unaffected by lime, cement or weather

2E BONDING MATERIAL

a. TYPICAL: Portland cement, dry set mortar, latex portland cement

or organic adhesive; licensed by TCA or to ANSI Standard
b. SHOWER, TUB: Portland cement, dry set mortar or latex portland
cement
c. EXTERIOR: Portland cement or latex portland cement

94-199 6873
5-97
2F SEALANT

a. TYPE: Fungical; FS TT S 001543 Class A or B

b. COLOR: White or as selected from standard

3A INSTALLATION

1 FLOOR THINSET ON CONCRETE

a. METHOD: F113 by TCA
b. GROUT: Sanded commercial cement, latex portland cement, dry set

2 WALL THINSET ON GYPSUM DRYWALL (moisture resistant)

a. METHOD: W242 or 243 by TCA
b. GROUT: Sanded commercial, cement, latex portland cement, dry
set mastic

4A FLOOR, WALL BASE, WAINSCOT

1 TILE
a. TYPE: Unglazed ceramic mosaic
b. SIZE: 2x2x1/4"
c. SELECTION RANGE: Standard

2 GROUT: Gray or as selected from min 12 standard colors

3 JOINT: Align floor, base wainscot and wall

4B SHOWER LOCATION

a. Tile, grout same

b. Floor thickset; slope as shown
c. Walls and base thickset on substrate backerboard under rough
carpentry Section

3.10 SPECIALITY

3.10.1 Accessory, Washroom 10 AW

1A SUBMITTAL

a. Brochure
b. Product data
c. Sample selected from standard
d. Installation directions
e. Shop drawings, if special installation

2A SUPPLIER (Subject to specification compliance)

a. Bobrick Washroom Eq Inc

b. Bradley Washfountain

2A ITEM LIST, SCHEDULE

Catalog numbers (Bobrick except as noted) are for description.

Comparable product of approved supplier acceptable

See Drawings

3A EXECUTION

1 Per supplier's recommendation and approved product data

95-199 6873
5-97
 2 Coordinate blocking and concealed mounting item to assure proper
location and ample strength

3 Provide accessory as recommended for specific substrate support

4 Install plum, level, neat and true, to approved appearance

5 Locate as shown and directed. If governing authority or supplier's

recommendation differ, consult with Architect before proceeding

3.10.2 Board, LCS and Tack 10 BLCS

1A WARRANTY

One year against becoming unserviceable or objectionable in appearance

because defective or nonconforming

1B SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
c. Sample color and finish, board and trim

2A SUPPLIER (chalk and tackboard)

a. Claridge
b. Greensteel
c. Weber Costello

2B LIQUID CHALK SURFACE

a. BRAND: LCS 5048, LCS 5412 by Claridge or equal

b. MATERIAL: Porcelain enamel on 24 gage steel; 1/2" Duracore and
sheet aluminum backing
c. COLOR: As selected from standard
d. HEIGHT: 4 ft unless otherwise shown - see drawings

2C TACKBOARD

a. MATERIAL: Tan 1/4" cork on 1/4" hardboard

b. BRAND: Claridge or equal
c. HEIGHT: 4 ft if not otherwise shown
d. LENGTH: One piece thru 16 ft; joint matching H
e. FINISH: As selected from standard

2D TRIM

a. TYPE: Extruded aluminum; hollow rail; fastening exposed only at

top and bottom edge; snap on or factory assembled
b. FINISH: Satin anodized
c. END CLOSURE: Neat, standard
d. MAPRAIL: Full length, cork insert selected from standard; metal
accessory; spring clip map hook at 3 ft

3A INSTALLATION

a. Level, plumb, at 908

b. Field fitting cut accurate, neat, snug
c. Anchorage secure; complete
d. Follow supplier's recommendation as approved
96-199 6873
5-97
3.10.3 Compartment, Plastic Laminate 10 CP

1A SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Shop drawings
c. Color sample

2A SUPPLIER

a. Accurate Partitions Corp

b. Bobrick Washroom Equip Inc
c. Knickerbocker Partition Corp
d. Sanymetal Prod Co Inc

2B MOUNTING

a. Floor supported front opening; overhead braced side opening

b. Urinal wall mounted, floor braced

2C CONSTRUCTION

1 PANEL

a. MINIMUM THICKNESS: Pilaster 1-1/4"; door 7/8"; partition 3/4"

b. CORE: Particleboard, 45 lb; CS 236, Type 1, Grade B, Class II

2 PLASTIC LAMINATE
a. TYPE: General purpose 1/16" high pressure
b. SUPPLIER: Micarta, Nevamar, Pioneer, Wilsonart
c. SELECTION: Standard print, solid color, wood grain
d. JOINT: Only if width over 60"
e. EDGE: Stainless steel

2D HARDWARE, ACCESSORY

1 BRACKET, STIRRUP, MISCELLANEOUS

a. ALUMINUM: Heat treat alloy, bright buff clear anodize
b. OTHER: Stainless steel; or bronze; polished chrome finish

2 DOOR HARDWARE
a. Slide latch
b. Combination bumper keeper
c. Bumper coat hook for inswing; pull coat hook for outswing
d. Recessed pivot hinge cam type

3 BOLTING: Chrome plated brass or polished stainless steel; through-

bolt with theft proof head; min 2 attachments at pilaster and
partition

4 PREPARATION
For recessed accessory under other Section

3.10.4 Extinguisher 10 E

97-199 6873
5-97
1A WARRANTY

Warrant work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Faulty operation
b. Finish deterioration

1B SUBMITTAL

Product data

1C STANDARD

a. Labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories

b. To approval by Fire Marshall

2A SUPPLIER (if conform to Specifications)

a. Elkhart Fire Protection

b. J L Industries
c. Walter Kidde & Co
d. Larsen's Mfg Co
e. Norris Industries

2B PRODUCT

1 EXTINGUISHER
a. TYPE: Dry chemical general purpose
b. CAPACITY: 10 lbs
c. UL RATING: 4-A, 40-B, C

2 CABINET (trim as selected)

a. TYPE: Recessed; prime coated steel
b. HANDLE: Stainless steel recessed

3 BRACKET: As selected from standard

3A INSTALLATION

a. Just prior to Substantial Completion

b. Per supplier's recommendation

3.10.5 Graphic 10 G

1A GENERAL

1 ALLOWANCE: See Abstract of Work, Division 1

2 SUBMITTAL
a. Shop drawings
b. Sample color, finish

2A ROOM - IDENTIFICATION ON DOOR

Design, layout, basic color, size as selected; to later detail

3A EXECUTION

Per approved shop drawings; as directed

98-199 6873
5-97
3.10.6 Louver, Aluminum 10 LA

1A SUBMITTAL

a. SHOP DRAWINGS: Specially fabricated product

b. BROCHURE: Standard product and equipment
c. SAMPLE: Color, pattern or texture

2A SUPPLIER

a. Construction Specialties Inc

b. Airolite
c. All-Lite Co
d. Elwin G Smith
e. Ventilouvre Co
f. Insul-Dyne Corp

2B LOUVER

1 MATERIAL
a. METAL: Extruded aluminum 6063 T52 alloy modified if anodized
b. THICKNESS: Min .081 inches frame blade

2 DESIGN (Fixed)
a. 4" deep stormproof
b. Max blade length 5'-6" without back support or mullion
c. Resist 20 psf windload

3 ACCESSORY
a. SCREEN: Removable aluminum frame; 18x14 aluminum mesh
b. CLOSURE ANGLE: 1x2x1/8" aluminum angle at head, sill, jamb
c. FASTENING: Stainless steel
d. BLANKOFF PLATE: If louver larger than duct size or if shown

4 FINISH
Dark bronze anodized

3A INSTALLATION

Secure per supplier's instruction and approved shop drawings. Flash and
seal to exclude water

3.10.7 Storage Locker 10 SL

1A WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or objectional

in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect includes
a. Finish deterioration
b. Loose part
c. Nonworking mechanism

1B SUBMITTAL

a. Shop drawings
b. Product data
c. Finish sample

1C STANDARD

FS AA L 486 as amended
99-199 6873
5-97
2A BRAND

Quiet Locker as shown by Republic or equal product by Lyon Metal Prod

2B DETAIL

a. HINGE: 5 knuckle; fixed pin; min 2" x 14 gage; one pair each
door
b. HANDLE: Quiet
c. LOCKING: Padlock type as selected; lock NIC
d. NUMBER: Standard selection
e. ACCESSORY: Prefinished; as shown. Include standard
hook/shelf/type
f. BOTTOM: Stainless steel
g. PREFINISH: Phosphate treat and bake; as selected from standard
h. TIER: As shown
i. FASTENING: Corrosion resistant
j. SLOPE TOP, END FILLER: Match prefinish

3A INSTALLATION

a. Secure, tight, aligned, 908 to adjacent work

b. Clean and protect from damage
c. Verify good working order

3.11 EQUIPMENT
3.11.1 Residential Appliance 11 RA

1A WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or objectional

in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect includes
a. Rough or difficult operation
b. Noisy operation
c. Loose or missing part
d. Noticeable deterioration of finish

1B UNDER OTHER SECTION

a. Plumbing and electrical rough in

b. Final wiring and plumbing connection

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Rough in drawings
b. Product data

2A PRODUCT

1 SUPPLIER (if equal to scheduled brand)

a. Westinghouse Electric
b. General Electric
c. Hotpoint
d. In-Sink-Erator
e. Whirlpool
f. Kitchen Aid

2 Minor deviation of size and feature acceptable provided overall

evaluation equal

100-199 6873
5-97
 3 All products from same supplier unless selected supplier does not
produce required product

3A INSTALLATION

a. POSITIONING: Place appropriately level, plumb and at right

angle to adjacent work
b. FITTING: If field cutting or scribing necessary; work neat,
accurate, professional; do not damage product or adjacent work
c. ANCHORING: As suggested by supplier. Attach securely so
product will perform to maximum ability without damage

4A SCHEDULE

See Drawings

3.12 FINISHING

3.12.1 Window Cover, Horizontal Blade 12 WH

1A BRIEF DESCRIPTION

One inch aluminum slat, manually operated, horizontal venetian blind

1B SUBMITTAL

a. Product data
b. Shop drawings
c. Blade sample
d. Installation instruction

2A BRAND

a. Bali by Marathon Carey-McFall

b. Riviera by Levolor

2B PRODUCT

1 SLAT
a. SIZE: 1" wide
b. ALLOY: Aluminum
c. FINISHING: Rounded corner; hole free of rough
edge and burr
d. COLOR: As selected from standard; one color throughout project

2 HEAD RAIL
a. SIZE: 1/1/2X.025 inch U shape; edge roll at top
b. MATERIAL: Bonderized steel
c. FINISH: Epoxid primer, baked enamel

3 BOTTOM RAIL
a. SHAPE: Closed; .030" thick; locked to head channel
b. APPEARANCE: Match headrail

4 TAPE SLAT SUPPORT

a. MATERIAL: Braided polyester; .045 to .066"; interbraid
crossladder
b. SPACING: At max 24"; within 6" of slat end

5 LIFT CORD
a. MATERIAL: Min .070"; high strength polyester jacket on rayon
101-199 6873
5-97
 core
b. NUMBER: 2 or 4 per supplier§s standard

6 TILTROD: Transparent plastic

7 TAPE ROLL: Celon stabilized plastic or .031" steel

8 CRADLE: .042" rust resistant steel

9 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART: Galvanized steel, bonderized, primed,

baked enamel

3A EXECUTION

a. Per supplier's instruction; secure

b. Field measure before fabrication
c. Adjust to smooth quiet operation

4A LOCATION

Window other than scheduled for darkening window cover

3.13 SYSTEM

3.13.1 Floor, Access 13 FA

1A DESCRIPTION

Series AS 11-1000 by Tate; as scheduled, shown and detailed or approved

equal

1B WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Deflection exceeding tolerance
b. Loss of electrical continuity
c. Loose or non working part
d. Deterioration without abuse

1C SUBMITTAL

a. Shop drawings
b. Product data including operation and maintenance instruction
c. Full size sample; if approved may use in Work

1D WORK UNDER OTHER SECTION

a. Electrical as shown; connection

2A ACCESS PANELS AND BOLTED STRINGER ASSEMBLY

Access panels and bolted stringer assembly shall perform as follows:

A. System weight - 6.5 lbs/ft2

B. Concentrated load - 1,000 lbs.
C. Static loads
1. Uniform loads - 250 lbs.
2. Ultimate loads - 2,800 lbs.
102-199 6873
5-97
 D. Rolling load
1. 10 passes - 400 lbs.
2. 10,000 passes - 400 lbs.
E. Impact load - 150 lbs.

2B BOLTED UNDERSTRUCTURE

The 12" finish floor height assembly shall provide an 8,000 pound axial
load without permanent deformation. Assembly shall provide a range of
adjustments in 1" increments to 2' and a means of leveling and locking
at a selected height which requires deliberate action to change height
settings and prevent vibrating displacement.

A. Pedestal base: Square base with not less than 16 square inches
of bearing, assembled to a stud or tube which engages the pedestal
head assembly. Secure to subfloor per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Pedestal Head: Fabricated head plate with corresponding stud or

tube that engages pedestal base
assembly. Head must positively locate the floor panel or receive
the stringer system and provide means to fasten the floor panel or
stringer directly to the head.

C. Stringer System: All steel construction designed and fabricated

to interlock with pedestal head and form a modular grid pattern with
members under edges of all field floor panels.

D. Air Flow Panels: All steel construction with 25% air perforated
top sheet and shall be supplied without adjustable damper
assemblies, capable of supporting 1,000 pounds, provide 800 C.F.M.
At a static pressure of 0.1" H2O.

E. Panel Surfacing: Newamar - Grade FL-12 or approved equal;

Laminated flooring product specifically for floor surface on access
floors.

1. Nominal thickness - 1/8"

2. Nominal size - 24" x 24"
3. Color and pattern - selected from standard
4. Performance standards - ANSI, NEMA publication LD3- 199 and
NFPA No. 56A, 1973, Sect. 4628 mod.
5. Vinyl edge trim - Mechanical locked and bonded to the panel
surface and flush with the laminated flooring

3A INSTALLATION AND TESTING

a. Installation according to manufacturer's recommendations

b. Testing of installation - NFPA 99 modified for application for

access floors by placing one test electrode on floor panel surface
and connecting the other test electrode to the grounded floor
support post of the floor system

c. Provide 5 space floor panels and 20 square feet of under-

structure system, delivered in manufacturer's standard packages,
clearly marked with contents and 2 panel lifting devices.

3.13.2 Metal Building 13 MB

1A WORK UNDER OTHER SECTION

103-199 6873
5-97
 a. Field painting door and frame
b. Foundation, slab, anchor bolt

1B RELATED SECTION (steel erection)

See laboratory testing Section

1C WARRANTY

1 Warrant Work for two years against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming.
Defect includes
a. Permanent deforming or loosening by wind within design
loading
b. Leaking into structure or interior

2 Warrant panel finish for five years against

a. Noticeable discolor
b. Mildew
c. Peel, crack, blister
d. Chalking
e. Irregular sheen change
f. Softening
g. Rusting

1D RESPONSIBILITY

Supplement general design with specific engineering; provide calculation

and affidavit if requested

1E SUPPLIER

a. Armco
b. American
c. Butler
d. Kirby
e. Metallic-Braden

1F STANDARD

a. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel

for buildings by AISC
b. Specifications for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural
Members by AISC
c. Do not reduce supplier's standard which exceeds these
Specifications

1C SUBMITTAL

SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate completeness, compliance and coordination

a. Size, quantity, material, finish, attachment, weight,
performance
b. Anchor bolt setting, framing, section, flashing detail
c. Certify by engineer licensed to practice in state of project
d. Submit with anchor bolt setting, column or frame LL reaction, DL
reaction and total load reaction

2A DESIGN (roof deck; bent or post and beam system)

1 UPLIFT
a. RATING: UL wind uplift
104-199 6873
5-97
 b. REFERENCE: Building Materials List, Guide 360RO 12 and 39 by UL
c. CLASS: 30 for 45 psf uplift; 60 for 75 psf uplift; 90 for 105
psf uplift

2 LIVELOAD (horizontal projection)

a. 20 PSF: 0-200 sf tributary area
b. 16 PSF: 200-600 sf tributary area
c. 12 PSF: Over 600 sf tributary area

3 PRIMARY FRAMING
a. Per NAVFAC DM-2 by US Navy Bureau of Yards and Docks
b. Per Recommended Design Practices Manual by MBMA

4 WIND
a. IN: 20 psf
b. OUT: 0.769 inward pressure

5 LOAD COMBINATION
a. DEAD, LIVE, WIND: DL + LL or DL + WL
b. DEAD, LIVE, CRANE: DL + 1/2LL + CL

2B FRAME MATERIAL

a. PLATE: ASTM A 36; yield min 42,000 psi

b. SHEET: ASTM A 245 Grade D; yield min 50,000, tensile 62,500 psi
c. GALVANIZE SHEET: ASTM A 446 Grade A, 1.25 oz
d. PIPE: API 5L x 42,000 psi yield

2C FRAME PRIMING (at plant)

a. PREPARATION: Remove dirt, grease, loose rust and mill scale

b. COAT: Zinc chromate red oxide alkyd to FS TT P 636 or TT P 86A;
min 1.5 mil thick

2D MINIMUM FRAMING MEMBER

a. PRIMARY COLDFORMED: 14 gage

b. SECONDARY COLDFORMED: 16 gage
c. INTERMEDIATE PIPE COLUMN: 12 gage
d. WELDED BUILTUP WEB: 1/8"
e. WELDED BUILTUP FLANGE:" 3/16"
f. BRACING ROD: 1/2" diam

2E FRAMING

a. RIGID FRAME, WING UNIT, CANOPY: Welded builtup I

b. END BEARING: Corner column and continuous rafter beam
c. ENDWALL COLUMNS: 8" cold C's or welded builtup I
d. PURLIN, GIRT: 8"x2-1/2" Z with stiffening lip at 508 for
nesting
e. EAVE STRUT: C for roof and wall panel
f. WIND BRACE (if required): Diagonal rod roof and sidewall,
reinforce by double roof purlin with diaphragm at diagonal roof
brace attachment; option fix base corner column or other approved
method. Omit if roof/wall cover adequate
g. FLANGE BRACE: Angle at inside of rigid frame to purlin or girt
h. OPENING: Frame to load; galvanize if exposed
i. EXPANSION: Provide adequate joint for longitudinal members and
cover. Flashed and counterflashed; performed or gasket

2F PANEL (steel)
105-199 6873
5-97
 1 MATERIAL (ASTM A 446)
a. 26 GAGE: Grade E 80,000 psi
b. 24, 22 GAGE: Grade A 33,0000 psi

2 GALVANIZING: 1.25 oz zinc psf

3 ROOF
a. PATTERN: 1-1/4" ribs at 12"; double 1/4" stiffener between ribs
b. COVER: 36"
c. FINISH: Acrylic color as selected from standard

2G PANEL FASTENER

1 SHEET METAL SCREW (cadmium or zinc plated 0.3 mil thick) a. ASA
B18.6: Type A or AB thread
b. WATERTIGHT: Metal and neoprene washer
c. OPTION: Self drilling 12-14 Type B; nonwalk point; 2 step
thread
d. WASHER: Aluminum

2 FINISH: Match panel

2H TAPE SEALER

1 MATERIAL: Pressure sensitive asbestos fiber per MIL C 18969 Type II

Class B; 1"x1/8" or 1/2"x3/32"

2 LOCATION: Sidelap, endlap and flashing

2I FLASH, TRIM (per SMACNA manual)

a. LOCATION: Rake, corner, eave, junction, opening

b. RIDGE: Match slope, profile, finish
c. CLOSURE: Rake, eave; EPDM or EPT gray

2J GUTTER (per SMACNA manual)

a. MATERIAL: Roll form 24 gage galvanize; finish to match roof

panel
b. STRAP: Snap on at 5 ft
c. FACILITY: Install or remove readily after panels in place
d. ROOF PANEL END: Concealed by gutter

2K DOWNSPOUT (per SMACNA manual)

a. MATERIAL: Rectangular 26 gage galvanize; finish to match wall

b. ATTACH: To wall panel at max 10 ft
c. ELBOW (at bottom): 458

2L ROOF INSULATION

a. MATERIAL: "Thermax", 1" thick, insulation/finish board or

approved equal
b. INSTALLATION: Per manufacturers recommendation

2M ASSEMBLY

1 ROOF PANEL: Continuous to 30 ft; endlap min 6"; lap at purlin

2 ROOF LAP
106-199 6873
5-97
 a. SEAL: Continuous before securing
b. OPTION: Anticapillary groove

3 ROOF FASTENING
a. PURLIN: 14 SMS at max 12"
b. RIBSHEET ENDLAP: Max attach each side of major rib
c. SIDELAP: 14 SMS at max 12" thru high flat of rib

3A INSTALLER

Factory trained and authorized

3B EXECUTION

a. Properly level, plumb and at 908 to adjacent work

b. Field cut neat, accurate, professional protect adjacent
c. Installation per supplier's instruction; secure to maximum
performance without damage from inadequate fastening

3.14 CONVEYING

3.14.1 Elevator, Hydraulic 14 EH

1A RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

a. Temporary barricade and enclosure

b. Temporary power and lighting
c. Hoistway, pit and machinery space, equipment room
d. Power wiring to elevator controller terminal with fused line
switch or circuit breaker, outlet for car light, pit light in
hatchway, outlet and switch for machine room light
e. Guide rail support, foundation
f. Ladder from lowest landing to pit floor if required
g. Recess for hoistway door, sill, signal equipment like indicator,
hall lantern, pushbutton station
h. Cutting, patching, chasing of wall, beam, masonry; grouting of
entrance sill

1B WARRANTY

Warrant Work for one year against becoming unserviceable or

objectionable in appearance because defective or nonconforming. Defect
includes
a. Noisy or rough operation
b. Vibration or bumping
c. Failure to operate at specified speed and capacity
d. Rough starting or stopping
e. Nonleveling
f. Failure to respond properly to signal

1C SUBMITTAL

a. PRODUCT DATA: Standard materials, product and equipment

b. SAMPLE: Color, pattern or texture
c. SHOP DRAWINGS: Specially fabricated product or installation
d. MAINTENANCE MANUAL (At Substantial Completion): 2 copies with
parts list, wiring diagrams
e. TEST COPY: After acceptance test submit results to Owner

107-199 6873
5-97
1D STANDARD

a. American National Standard Institute Safety Code ANSI A17.1

b. National Fire Protection Association Standard 72E and ASME/ANSI
c. Local, state and Life Safety code
d. ADA and ANSI A 117.1

1E PERMIT, TEST, INSPECTION

a. Arrange and pay for permit and test required by government

b. Deliver or post final inspection certificate if required

1F TEMPORARY USE

a. Do not reduce or limit warranty to Owner because of construction

use
b. Fully protect floor, walls, and ceiling with 3/4" plywood, or
use unfinished elevator for construction

1G MAINTENANCE (For 3 months after Final Acceptance)

a. Provide regular examination, necessary adjustment, greasing,

oiling, cleaning, supply and part to keep equipment in perfect
operation, except work made necessary by misuse, accident or
negligence of others
b. Include 24 hour callback service
c. Check elevator at least once per month during maintenance perio
d. Record maintenance and service call in log maintained on
premises

2A BRAND

Seville 30 Oildraulic by Dover or approved equal ADA accessible

2B GENERAL FEATURES

1 SOUND CONTROL
a. Sound isolation couplings
b. Oildraulic silencer

2 LEVELING: Standard

3 CONTROL: Oildraulic; conventional plus solid state logic; NEMA 1

fully enclosed cabinet

4 EMERGENCY LOWERING: Provide safe lowering of cab by manual valve to

lowest level in event of power unit failure

5 PLUNGER
a. UNIT: Standard single cylinder single acting polished steel
tube
b. PROTECTION: Waterproof wrapping over rust inhibiting finish
c. ASSEMBLY: Oil sealed with babbit lined or bronze
bearings
d. CASING: Required
e. GROUNDING: Provide to prevent electrolysis

6 EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION: Battery operated emergency return

operation. Battery power supply of suitable units automatically
maintained at full charge with charging voltage regulator

108-199 6873
5-97
2C SIGNAL AND GRAPHIC

a. Position indicator in car

b. Light up operating button
c. Hall lantern, gong
d. Handicap signal and control package; tactile marking if required

2D ALARM (Locate as directed)

a. Sound and light

b. Button in cab

2E HOISTWAY ENTRANCE

a. Center opening 3'-6" x 7"-0" high

b. Door and frame finish stainless steel stain
c. Sill aluminum extrusion
d. Leaking edge soft retracting on contract
e. Electronic door sensing device

2F CAB

a. FRAME: Structural steel

b. SUBFLOOR: Wood with sheet steel bottom. Recess for flooring
c. WALL FINISH: Front wall stainless steel satin; other wall
plastic laminate as selected
d. CEILING: Standard white plastic grid
e. BASE: Under resilient flooring Section
f. FLOORING: Under resilient flooring Section
g. LIGHTING: Recessed incandescent
h. ENTRANCE: Match hoistway
i. HANDRAIL: Across back of cab; stainless steel as approved

4A SCHEDULE

a. TYPE: Passenger
b. CAPACITY: 3000 lb
c. SPEED (up speed with rated load): 100 fpm
d. SPEED DOWN: 100 fpm
e. OPERATION: Simplex collective
f. DOOR: Center opening
g. POWER SUPPLY: Under electrical Division
h. INCLUDE: Emergency light, vent fan, provision for telephone,
hoistway access package

3.15 MECHANICAL

3.15.1 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division

15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.02 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Install work in stages per specified sequencing. During the

Construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations
with Contracting Officer. Refer to Section 01042.
109-199 6873
5-97
1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the
following sections:

1. Section 15121
2. Section 15140
3. Section 16170
4. Section 15190
5. Section 15245
6. Section 15260
7. Section 15280
8. Section 15290
9. Section 15410
10. Section 15510
11. Section 15515
12. Section 15535
13. Section 15540
14. Section 15671
15. Section 15682
16. Section 15785
17. Section 15835
18. Section 15855
19. Section 15870
20. Section 15890
21. Section 15910
22. Section 15936
23. Section 15990

C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete

submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a
single submittal.
D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to Uniform Building Code and Uniform Mechanical Code 1991

as modified by the City of Houston.
B. Fire Protection: Conform to City of Houston Fire Code and
N.F.P.A.
C. Plumbing: Conform to Uniform Plumbing Code 1991 Edition as
modified by the City of Houston.
D. ASHRAE 15-1994 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
E. Permits, Fees and Inspections: Obtain and pay for all necessary
plan checks, permits for electrical work required by any
constituted public authorities having jurisdiction including
utilities. Arrange and pay for all required inspections or
examinations and deliver certificates of inspections to the
Contracting Officer. Pay all utility companies' charges.

1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by

Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet
Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other
Sections. Obtain permission of Contracting Officer before
proceeding.

110-199 6873
5-97
3.15.2 15121 Expansion Compensation

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Flexible pipe connections

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15510 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings.

B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Conform to Standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturer's

Association.

1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Base expansion calculations on

1. 50 degrees F installation temperature to 210 degrees F, for hot

water heating and 140 degrees F for domestic hot water, plus 30
percent safety factory,
2. 80 degrees F. Installation temperature to 40 degrees F or
chilled water piping, plus 30 percent safety factor;

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01400.

B. Flexible pipe connector shop drawing data to include maximum
allowable temperature and pressure rating, overall face-to-face
length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per
foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid
structure and total number of wires in braid.
C. Expansion joint shop drawings to include maximum allowable
temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion
compensation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS

A. For steel piping construct with stainless steel inner hose and
braided exterior sleeve.
B. For copper piping construct with bronze inner hose and braided
exterior sleeve.
C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450 degrees F
and 200 psi WOG and 250 degrees F.
D. Flexible pipe connections shall be as manufactured by:
Amber/Booth.

2.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Provide flexible pipe connections suitable to connect to adjoining

piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe sized units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
111-199 6873
5-97
 A. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment
supported by vibration isolation.
B. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to
control expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets,
and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion
joints where required.
C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement.
Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and
anchor other end.
D. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure where necessary.
Provide pipe guides so that movement takes place along axis of
pipe only.

3.15.3 15140 Support and Anchors

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe hangers, supports, and associated anchors.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15260 : Piping Insulation

B. Section 15510 : Hydronic Piping

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01040.

B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch Carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Size 2 to 4 inches and Over: Carbon steel,
adjustable, clevis.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke,
cast iron roll, double hanger.
D. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper
plated.
E. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage
galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments,
minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.

2.02 HANGER RODS

A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or

continuous threaded.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Design hangers to allow replacement without disengagement of

supported pipe.
112-199 6873
5-97
 B. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

2.05 FINISH

A. Provide all hangers in hot dipped galvanized steel finish unless

otherwise specified herein.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as follows:

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER

1/2 to 1-1/4" 6'-6" 3
1-1/2 to 2" 10'-0" 3
2-1/2 to 3" 10'-0" 1
4 to 6" 10'-0" 5/8
8 to 12" 14'-0" 7/8"

B. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

C. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
D. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same
elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
E. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

3.15.4 15170 Motors

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single phase electric motors.

B. Three phase electric motors.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical

characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting,
mechanical connections, lubrications, and wiring instructions.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating
113-199 6873
5-97
 procedures.
C. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data
including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric

motors for commercial use, and their accessories, with minimum
three years documented product development, testing, and
manufacturing experience.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable electrical code.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having
jurisdiction indicating approval of high efficiency motors.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified
by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by

maintaining factory covers and suitable weather- proof covering.
For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and
store separately.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment

manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these
specifications.
B. Electrical Service:

1. As Scheduled.

C. Type:

1. Open drip-proof except where specifically noted otherwise.

2. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C
environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1
limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure
type.

D. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.
E. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase,
cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size,
manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power
factor.
F. Wiring Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor

quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal
lugs interminal box sized to NFPA 70 threaded for conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made
directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame.

2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS

114-199 6873
5-97
 A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A insulation, NEMA Service Factor,
prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.

2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding on fourth of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to six time full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure; Class A
insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or
ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide
capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in
parallel with run capacitor in parallel with run capacitor
remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A insulation, NEMA Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.

2.05 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque

B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque:
NEMA Design B characteristics.
D. Design Construction, Testing, and Performance or Pull Out Torque:
NEMA Design B characteristics.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedures: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test
motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in
compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast
iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel
inserts.
H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC
thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated
solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter.
I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with
housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated
for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing
load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end
of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on
nameplate.
J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
K. Part Winding Start above 254T Frame Size: Use part of winding to
reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent
of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately
115-199 6873
5-97
 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque.
L. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage
when tested in accordance with IEEE 112.
M. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage
when tested in accordance with IEEE 112.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans: Split phase type.
B. Single phase motor for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent
split capacitor type.
C. Single phase motors for fans, & blowers: Capacitor start type.
D. Single phase motors for fans & blowers: Capacitor start,
capacitor run type.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors
with shaft in any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

3.03 NEMA OPEN MOTOR SERVICE FACTOR SCHEDULE

HP 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200RPM 900RPM

1/6-1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35

1/2 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15
3/4 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15
1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15
1.5-150 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15

3.04 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE: THREE PHASE - ENERGY EFFICIENT, OPEN DRIP-

PROOF

Minimum
Minimum Percent
NEMA Percent Power
HP RPM(Syn) Frame Efficiency
1 1200 145T 81 72
1-1/2 1200 182F 83 73
2 1200 184T 85 75

3 1200 213T 86 60
5 1200 215T 87 65
7-1/2 1200 254T 89 73
10 1200 256T 89 74
15 1200 284T 90 77
20 1200 286T 90 78

25 1200 324T 91 74
30 1200 326T 91 78
40 1200 364T 93 77
50 1200 365T 93 79

3.15.5 15190 Mechanical Identification

PART 1 GENERAL

116-199 6873
5-97
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.
E. Signs

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09900 - Painting: Identification painting.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for
mechanical identification.
C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,
location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model
number.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each
product required.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special
procedures, and installation.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES & SIGNS

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black

letters on light contrasting background color.

2.02 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag

size minimum 1-1/2 inch square with smooth edges.

B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.03 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8

inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters.
2. 1-1/2 inch to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe:
8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters.
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12
inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters.
4. 8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch
long color field, 2-1/2 inch high letters.
5. Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch
117-199 6873
5-97
 long color field, 3-1/2 inch high letters.
6. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09900, semi- gloss enamel,

colors conforming to ASME A13.1.

2.04 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid
plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum
information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of
fluid being conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with
pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously
printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick,
manufactured for direct burial service.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification

materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil
painting.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical

fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure
permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09900.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment,
tanks, and water treatments devices with nameplates. Small
devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
G. Identify control panels and major control components outside
panels with plastic nameplates.
H. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with
nameplates.
I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. J. Identify
air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.
K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control
schematic C.
L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify
service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and
align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20
feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each
valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
M. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air
handling unit identification number and area served. Locate
identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
118-199 6873
5-97
 N. Provide sign at each chiller per ASHRAE 13, 1994, Section 11.2.

3.15.6 15245 Vibration Isolation

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Inertia bases.
B. Vibration isolation.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 15121 - Piping Expansion Compensation.
C. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.
D. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring systems: Electrical
characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP,
plus connected piping and ductwork.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with
location and load on each.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Record actual locations of hangers including attachments points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Amber Booth

2.02 INERTIA BASES

A. Structural Bases:

1. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue

stress on machine, and to transmit design loads to isolators
and snubbers.

2. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets,

supporting equipment and motor with motor slide rails.

B. Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.

2. Construction: Structured steel channel perimeter frame, with
gusseted brackets and anchor bolts, anchor bolts, adequately
reinforced, concrete filled.
3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and
snubbers to base.
4. Concrete: Reinforced 3,000 psi concrete.

119-199 6873
5-97
2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Open Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

A. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped

galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
B. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent

vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and
0.6 of maximum deflection.
3. Spring Mounts: Provide with levelling devices, minimum 0.25
inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated
hardware.
4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet
requirements for neoprene pad isolators.

B Restrained Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

A. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped

galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
B. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent

vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and
0.6 of maximum deflection.
3. Spring Mounts: Provide with levelling devices, minimum 0.24
inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated
hardware.
4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflation of 0.05 inch; meet
requirements for neoprene pad isolators.
5. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.

C. Closed Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

A. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped

galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
B. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing

separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.

3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent

vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and
0.6 of maximum deflection.

4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting

requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side
stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance.

D. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

A. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped

120-199 6873
5-97
 galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
B. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing

separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.
3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent
vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and
0.6 of maximum deflection.
4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting
requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side
stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops.

E. Spring Hanger:

1. Spring Isolators:

A. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped

galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.
B. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent

vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and
0.6 of maximum deflection.
3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting
requirements for neoprene pad isolators.
4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment.

F. Neoprene Pad Isolators:

1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.

A. 30 durometer.
B. Minimum 1/2 inch thick.
C. Maximum loading 40 psi.
D. Height of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width.

2. Configuration: Single layer. 1/2 inch thick waffle pads

bonded each side of 1/4 inch thick steel plate.

G. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches

deflection with threaded insert.
H. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass
fiber.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install isolation for motor driven equipment.
C. Bases:

1. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping

pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inch clearance between
housekeeping pad and base.
3. Adjust equipment level.

D. Install spring hangers without binding.

E. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear
under normal operating conditions.
121-199 6873
5-97
 F. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating
weights substantially different from installed weights, block up
equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is
applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

3.15.7 15260 Piping Insulation

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM C 195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal

B. ANSI/ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Black and Pipe Thermal Insulation
C. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum - alloy sheet and plate.
D. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
E. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
F. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application

with five years minimum experience.
B. Materials: Flame spread smoke developed rating of 25/50 in
accordance with NFPA 255.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for
each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01340.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Owens Corning
B. Manville
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 INSULATION

A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation: ANSI/ASTM C547; 'k' value of

0.23 at 75 degrees F noncombustible.

2.03 JACKETS

A. Exterior Applications: Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.20 inch

thick, smooth finish.
122-199 6873
5-97
2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch thick aluminum.

B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch, 0.15 thick wide aluminum.
C. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral
wool.
D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449.
E. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated 9 oz/sq. Yd.
F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least
visible locations.
D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves,
unions, flanged, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion
joints.
E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying
fluids 140 degrees F, or above, do not insulate flanges and unions
at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such
locations.
F. Provide an insert, no less than 6 inches long, of same thickness
and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and
piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches, diameter
or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points.
Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material
suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated
inserts may be used.
G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and
interruptions.
H. Jackets;

1. Indoor, concealed applications: Insulated dual temperature

pipes or pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature
shall have vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field
applied. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded
insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe,
and finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
2. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical
equipment rooms or in finished spaces, insulate as for
concealed applications. Cover with aluminum jacket.
J. Domestic cold water piping within 5' - 0" of exterior walls or in
ceiling space directly below roof shall be considered exposed to
freezing.

3.03 SCHEDULE

PIPING Thickness

Chilled Water ----2" & smaller 1"

Chilled Water ----2" thru 6" 2"
Cold Condensate Drains ----3/4 & larger 1-1/2"
123-199 6873
5-97
Piping Exposed to Freezing 1"
Domestic Hot Water 1"

3.15.8 15280 Equipment Insulation

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Equipment insulation
B. Covering

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation covering.

B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement

B. ANSI/ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation.
C. ANSI/ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
D. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
F. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator: Compant specializing in insulation application with

five years minimum experience.
B. Insulation and Covering: Flame spread smoke developed rating of
25/50 in accordance with NFPA 255.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for
equipment scheduled.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01340.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by

manufacturers of adhesive and insulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Owens Corning
B. Manville
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.

2.02 INSULATION

A. Type A: Flexible mineral fiber blanket; ANSI/ASTM C553; 'k' value

of 0.24 at 75 degrees F 2.0 lb/cu density.
B. Type B: Rigid mineral fiber board; ANSI/ASTM C612 'k' value of
0.24 at 75 degrees F 6.0 lb/cu ft. Density.
124-199 6873
5-97
 C. Type C: Cellular glass: ANSI/ASTM C552; 'k' value of 0.35 at 75
degrees F, 8.0 lb/cu ft. Density.
D. Type D: Calcium silicate: ANSI/ASTM C533; asbestos free; 'k'
value of 0.40 at 250 degrees F, 14 lb/cu ft. Density.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Bedding Compounds: Non-shrinking, permanently flexible,

compatible with insulation.
B. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric
resin, compatible with insulation.
C. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral
wool.
D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive resistant metal; hexagonal pattern.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
C. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving,
scoring, and bevelling insulation, if necessary. Secure
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires
or bands.
D. Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound
to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier
cement.
E. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of
insulating cement.
F. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal
insulation around such.
G. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for
maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a
manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.

3.02 SCHEDULE

EQUIPMENT TYPE THICKNESS

Chiller Cold Surfaces C 1"
(not factory insulated)
Chilled Water Pump Bodies C 1-1/2"

3.15.9 15290 Ductwork Insulation

PART 1 GENERAL/sk 1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Duct Liner.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.

B. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
C. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Minerals.
E. NEPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
125-199 6873
5-97
 F. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
G. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Under Provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures
which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards
will be achieved.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in

accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, UL 723.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this

section with minimum three years experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled

with manufacturer's density and thickness.
B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and
construction traffic.
C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical
damage.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by

manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum
period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturers:
1. Manville
2. Owens Corning

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1. 'C' value: ASTM C518, .23 at 75 degrees F.

2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft.
4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 ft/min.

C. Adhesive:

1. Waterproof fire-retardant type.

D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, Impact Applied with integral

head.

2.02 BLANKET TYPE INSULATION

126-199 6873
5-97
 A. Manufacturers
1. Manville
2. Owens Corning

B. Insulation
1. Foil-faced 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 pound per cubic foot density,
flexible glass fiber blanket.
2. Minimum "R" value of 4.0.
3. Factory applied vapor barrier, reinforced foil-face.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Duct Liner Application:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to
SMACNA Standards for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required
for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation
thickness.

C. Blanket Insulation Application

1. Apply to all rond, un-lined supply or return ducts.

2. Apply to backside of all supply or return air devices to
include damper housings, square to round transitions, etc. Lap
device insulation over lined duct for a minimum o f 1'-0" and seal
insulation to duct, or butt joint to adjoining blanket insulation.
3. Insulation shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces with a 2"
tab overlap on all seams. Butt edges of insulation firmly
together. Coat under side of all seams with adhesive, staple on
6" centers with outward clinch staples, seal staples with vapor
barrier tape and mastic.

3.03 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance

within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated.

3.04 FLEXIBLE GLASS FIBER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE

DUCTWORK THICKNESS
Inch

Supply Ducts 1"

Outside Ducts 1"

3.15.10 15410 Plumbing Piping and Specialties

PART 1 GENERAL

127-199 6873
5-97
1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes plumbing piping systems and plumbing

specialties for water distribution and collection system.

1. Plumbing piping systems within the building including the

following:

A. Potable water distribution, including cold and hot water

supply.
B. Sanitary drainage and vent systems.

2. Plumbing specialties for water distribution systems; soil,

waste, and vent systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall conform to requirement of Section - 1300 -

Submittals.
B. Submit complete product data as required under General Conditions.
C. Submit certificates by a testing laboratory, hired and paid by the
manufacturer.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compliance: ASME B31.9.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

A. Scope of the Work: Furnish and install all domestic water system
as specified.
B. Materials

1. Piping Inside Building: Shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper

with wrought copper sweat fittings.
2. Piping Outside Building: Shall be Schedule 80 PVC with
pressure rated fittings.
3. Hose Bibbs: Shall be No. 24 by Woodford with Watts 8 A.C.
Vacuum breaker or equivalent Crane No. 2293 WE 27.
4. Piping System Working Pressure Ratings:

A) Water Distribution Systems, Below Ground: 150 psig.

B) Water Distribution Systems, Above Ground: 125 psig.
C) Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 10 foot head of water.

2.02 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper.
B. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, service class.
C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301.
D. Solvent joint Schedule 40 PVC, DWU fittings.

2.03 FITTINGS AND VALVES

A. Pressure and Drainage Fittings for Pipe and Tubes: Suitable for
working pressure, pipe, tube, and service.
B. Joining Materials: Solder, brazing and welding filler metals;
couplings.
C. Valves: Gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves suitable
128-199 6873
5-97
 for service.

2.04 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers: ASSE Standard backflow preventers for flow

rate and maximum pressure loss required, 150 psig minimum working
pressure.
B. Water Pressure Regulators: ASSE 1003, initial working pressure
150 psig minimum.
C. Water-Tempering Valves: Manually-adjustable, thermostatically-
controlled.
D. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties: Strainers, hose bibbs, wall
hydrants, hose-end drain valves, stop and waste drain valves;
water hammer arresters, trap seal primer valves, stack flashing
fittings, vent caps, vent terminals, roof flashing assemblies.

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.01 VALVES

A. All valves and stop cocks shall be provided and installed where
shown, or as necessary to make all systems complete. Valves shall
be provided on inlet and outlet connections, apparatus, fixtures
and on branch lines to groups of fixtures, on lines leading to
exterior hose bibbs and by-passes. Exact locations shall be
worked out on site. Necessary drain valves shall be provided to
drain all piping systems.
B. The supply of both hot and cold water to each fixture shall be
equipped with stop valve. All exposed valves and cocks shall be
chromium plated to correspond to pipe finish.
C. Provide drain valve to drain all equipment.
D. Provide vacuum breaks at piping outlets with hose connections.
E. All valves shall have screwed, flanged or hub ends to match pipe
joining at point of application.

3.02 JOINTS

A. Threaded joints, welded and pipe fittings shall conform to the

current requirements for ASME "Code for Pressure Piping", except
the qualification tests are not required.
B. Joints in copper water lines shall be soldered using lead free
solder. The finished installation shall exhibit craftsmanlike
installation.
C. Unions and Flanges: Unions or flanged connections shall be
provided to allow each item of equipment to be removed from the
system without removing any main piping. Unions shall be
malleable iron or steel ground joints, iron to brass seats.
Flanges shall be steel with Cranite gaskets. Flanges and unions
shall be designed for working pressure 50% above maximum pressure
of the system served. Unions and flanged connections shall be of
the same finish as piping, galvanized or black. Copper unions
shall be copper to copper.
D. Air Chambers: Air chambers of the same diameter and materials as
the supply pipe and 24" long shall be provided concealed in
partitions or chases on both hot and cold branches to each
plumbing fixture.
E. Expansion and Contraction: Shall be allowed for by use of swing
joints of changes in direction, where necessary, and as shown on
the Drawings.
F. Fire Seal: Fire stop seal all piping penetrations of fire rated
assemblies.
129-199 6873
5-97
3.03 TESTING: All water lines shall be tested at a hydrostatic
pressure of 125 p.s.i. For 12 hours.

3.04 STERILIZATION: After completion of all work, tests and

operational adjustments and before final acceptance of the system, all
domestic water piping shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution of
chlorine containing not less than 50 parts per million of chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be liquid chlorine conforming to the
requirements of the U. S. Army Specifications No. 401. The
sterilization solution shall be allowed to remain in systems for a
period of eight (8) hours, during which time all valves shall be opened
and closed several times. After sterilization, the solution shall be
flushed from the systems with clean, potable water, until the residual
chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million, by analysis,
unless otherwise directed.

3.05 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

A. Scope of the Work:

1. Furnish and install all sanitary sewer systems as specified

herein.
2. Lead Flashing installed in Section 7.

B. Materials:

1. Piping: Shall be DWV Schedule 40 PVC, in all locations, other

than the Control Building which shall be HUB and Spigot, Cast-Iron
soil pipe and fittings below slab on grade; Hubless, Cast-Iron
soil pipe and fittings above 1st floor slab.
2. Cleanouts:

A. Finished Area Floors: Josam 58010-30 cast iron ferule with

lead seal plug and Nikaloy flange ring and cover plate with
securing screw. Cover plate shall be flush to finish
floor, and suitable for floor covering installed.
B. Walls: Josam 58710 Series.
C. Exterior: Josam 56000 Series with 58015-1, cast iron body,
gasketed ABS plug, and heavy duty scoriated cover. All
exterior cleanouts shall be set at finished grade in 6"
thick concrete pad, finished smooth on top. Concrete shall
project 6" on each side of cleanout.

3. Lead Flashing: Shall be sheet lead, not less than four pounds
per square foot weight.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Shall be Zurn, Josam and J. R.
Smith.

C. Installation:

1. Slopes: Drainage lines 3" and smaller shall be sloped 1/4"

per foot toward the main sewer. Larger lines shall be sloped 1/8"
per foot. All horizontal pipe shall be run in straight lines at a
uniform slope. All changes in direction of flow of horizontal
lines shall be made with "Y" and 1/8" bends. Grades of horizontal
drainage piping shall not be less than those approved by the
Administrative Authority having jurisdiction. Reference storm
drainage plan for storm pipe slopes.
2. Drains: Provide all floor, area, and equipment drains. All
drains shall be provided with cast iron, deep seal P-traps.
130-199 6873
5-97
 Drains to be installed in mechanical spaces shall be located to
conform with the drain location on equipment to be furnished and
as finally arranged. Funnel drains shall have deep seal "P" trap.

3. Cleanouts: Shall be installed in each change of direction

greater than 45 degrees, at ends of lines, at bases of risers, at
maximum on center spacing required by the local governing official
or at 70"-0" on center and at other points necessary to enable
cleaning out of all pipe sections. Cleanouts shall be the same
size as pipe up to 4" and shall be 4" for larger pipe. Cleanouts
shall be the same size as pipe up to 4" and shall be 4" for larger
pipe. Cleanouts
installed through membrane floors shall be provided with clamping
collar.
4. Traps and Vents: Each plumbing fixture shall be individually
trapped and vented with vent and waste stacks full size
throughout. Provide all reducers, increasers, special flanges and
fittings, where required, between piping, fixtures and equipment.
All vents through the roof shall be offset, if required, to
maintain a minimum clear distance at 15' from any intake. (For
Example: Fresh Air Intake.)
5. Lead Flashing: Provide for all pipe penetrations through the
roof. Extend vent 8" above roof. Offset vents at outside walls
so that they pass through roof at least 36" from outside walls.
Following the installation, thoroughly turn flashing down into the
pipe cavity (1-1/2" minimum) and allow expansion room for pipe.
Coordinate with building roofing system for installation.

D. Testing: Test all sanitary sewer system piping by filling with

water to the top of vents and drains and allow to stand for not
less than twelve (12) hours.

3.15.10.1 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes furnishing of and paying for all materials,

labor, services, equipment, licenses, taxes, other items, and
appliances necessary for the execution, installation and
completion of all work specified herein and/or shown on the
drawings.
B. The work described in this section of the specifications includes
but is not limited to the following:

1. Plumbing fixtures as specified herein and as indicated on the

drawings, complete with all trim and related items such as
supplies, traps, drains, cleanouts, water closet seats and bolt
covers, fixture supports and other accessory items necessary for a
complete and fully functional fixture installation.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work performed in accordance with local codes and standards as

enforced by local authorities.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall conform to requirement of Section -1300 -

Submittals.
131-199 6873
5-97
 B. Submit complete product data as required under General
Conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Certain manufacturers identification numbers have been used to

indicate a standard of quality. Products by other manufacturers
as indicated by subsequent paragraphs of this section are
acceptable.
B. Plumbing fixtures and related items shall be a complete unit ready
for installation as set forth in the individual numbers listed
below.
C. Plumbing Fixtures: American Standard or equivalent by Kohler,
Eljer, or Crane.

1. Fixtures to be water conserving type.

2. Wall-hung lavatories and urinals shall be furnished
complete with carriers providing support from floor.
3. Countertop sinks shall be furnished complete with
mounting rings where required.
4. Fixtures shall be white unless specified otherwise.
5. Fixture Support Manufacturers: J. R. Smith, Wade, or
Zurn.

D. Roof drains, hydrants, floor drains, shock absorbers, carriers,

and traps: J.R. Smith, Josam, Zurn, or Wade.
E. Flush valves: Sloan Royal.
F. Toilet seats: Church, Olsonite, Beneke, or Bemis.
G. Faucets: Zurn or Chicago Faucet Company.
H. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay or Just.
I. Caulking: Silicon sanitary sealant, applied to plumbing fixture
installation points.
J. Water Cooler Manufacturers: Halsey Taylor.

2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Water Closet (ADA Compliant)

1. Equivalent to American Standard Model Number 3043.102,

vitreous china elongated closet, 17-1/4" high, floor outlet, 1.6
gpf siphon jet.
2. Sloan Royal Model Number 8111 MC flush valve, with OPTIMA
Plus, battery powered infra-red sensor with over-ride button.
3. Church Number 295C Duraloy white open front seat with check
hinge. Two (2) bolt caps.

B. Lavatory (Wall Hung, ADA Compliant)

1. Equivalent to American Standard, Model Number 0356.421 Lucerne

20 x 18 inch vitreous china lavatory, Zurn Z- 7443 single lever
faucet with aerator with 2.0 gpm flow restrictor, except where
served by instant water heater.
2. One (1) McGuire Model Number 155-WC grid drain with 1- 1/4
inch offset tailpiece.
3. One (1) McGuire Model Number 8872, 1-1/4 inch semi-cast brass
P-trap. Two (2) McGuire Model Number 2165 supplies to wall,
chrome nipple with stop. Provide Truebro LAV-GUARD 103K
insulation kit in white. Mounting height of 32 inches from basin
rim to finished floor.
132-199 6873
5-97
 4. Provide with concealed arms support.

C. Urinal (Wall Hung, ADA Compliant)

1. Equivalent to American Standard Model Number 6501.010

Washbrook vitreous china washout urinal with 3/4 inch top spud and
wall hanger.
2. Sloan Royal Model Number 8186-1 MC flush valve, with OPTIMA
Plus, battery powered infra-red sensor with over-ride button.
3. Provide with carrier.

D. Electric Water Cooler (Wall-Hung, ADA Compliant)

1. Equivalent to Halsey Taylor, Model Number HTSER-Q ADA and ANS

117:1 compliant barrier-free water cooler with 8.8 GPH capacity at
80F room temperature, 120Volt, 60HZ.
2. One (1) McGuire Model Number 8872, 1-1/4 inch semi-cast brass
p-trap.
3. One (1) McGuire Model Number 2165 supply to wall, chrome
nipple with stop.
4. All exposed portions of the contour-formed receptors, wall
facing, push buttons, etc. Shall be non corrosive No. 300
stainless steel.
5. UL listed, ARI certified to meet Standard 1010-94, 500 watts
maximum input.
6. Refrigeration system shall utilize R134A and be warranted for
five (5) years minimum.
7. Manufacturer shall certify the unit to be lead free as defined
by the Safe Drinking Water Act.

E. Sink (Two Compartment, Stainless Steel)

1. Equivalent to Just, Model Number DL-ADA-2133-A-GR stainless

steel sink with I.D. Of each 16 inch by 14 inch by 6 inches deep.
Drains shall be rear-centered in each compartment and be equipped
with J-ADA-35 stainless steel cup strainer. Two (2) offset 1-1/2
inch tailpiece. Two (2) McGuire Model Number 8912, 1- 1/2 inch by
1-1/2 inch semi-cast brass P-trap.
2. One (1) McGuire Model Number 111, 1-1/2" continuous waste.
Two (2) McGuire Model Number 2165 supplies to wall, chrome nipple
with stop. American Standard 4205.274 kitchen faucet with hose
spray.
3. Provide two (2) J-ADA-150 1-1/2" offset cup strainer insulator
kits, two (2) Truebro LAV-GUARD 99 stop and riser insulator kits,
and additional accessories as necessary for complete coverage of
under sink piping.
4. Provide 1/2" thick closed-cell foam sheet insulation on entire
bottom of sink compartments.

F. Janitor's Sink

1. Equivalent to American Standard Model Number 7692.049, 22

inches by 18 inches by 10 inches deep, enameled cast iron service
sink, with stainless steel rim guard, wall hanger and 7798.176
Trap Standard.
2. American Standard Model Number 8341.075 service sink faucet
with vacuum breaker and stops in shanks.

G. Shower (Wall mounted, ADA Compliant)

1. Equivalent to Zurn Model Number Z-7101-DV-HW Temp-Gard Shower

133-199 6873
5-97
 Unit complete with single handle pressure balancing mixer shower
unit, hand/wall shower head, 60" flexible metal hose, 24" mounting
slide bar wall connection, two-way diverter valve, standard shower
head, arm and wall flanges.

H. Floor Drain (Mechanical Space)

1. Equivalent to J. R. Smith, Figure Number 3510-F19 cast iron

floor drain with 8" polished nickel-bronze top with integral 8-
1/4" X 3-1/4" oval funnel, adjustable strainer with flashing clamp
device and trap primer connection. Provide flashing clamp on
drains installed above first floor, slab on grade. Size of drain
as shown on drawings.

I. Floor Drain (Finished Space)

1. Equivalent to J. R. Smith, Figure Number 2005-A-P050 cast

iron floor drain with polished nickel-bronze top, adjustable
strainer with flashing clamp device and trap primer connection.
Provide flashing clamp on drains installed above first floor, slab
on grade. Size of drain as shown on drawings.

J. Cleanout (Finished Floor)

1. See Section 15410, 3.05, B, 2, a.

K. Cleanout (Exterior)

1. See Section 15410, 3.05, B, 2, c.

L. Hose Bibb

1. See Section 15410, 2.01, B, 3.

M. Wall Hydrants (Non-Freeze)

1. Equivalent to J. R. Smith, Figure Number 5609-PB "Line-

Gard" anti-siphon non-freeze wall hydrant, cast polished brass
face, with vacuum breaker.
2. Mounting height of 18 inches from center line of hydrant to
finished grade.

N. Trap Primer

1. Equivalent to J. R. Smith Figure 2699 trap primer.

Contractor shall supply 1/2" type K copper, with no joints, from
trap primer to floor drain (see drawings), and a 12" X 12" Wall
Access Cover with secured frame, J.R. Smith Figure 4735-12X12.

O. Equipment Connection

1. See Detail 2/P-4.

P. Water Heater (Storage)

1. See schedule on drawings for capacity, etc.

2. Provide unit complete with UL label; A.S.M.E. Temperature and
pressure relief, and A.S.S.E. Approved vacuum relief.

Q. Water Heater (Storage)

134-199 6873
5-97
 1. See schedule on drawings for capacity, etc.
2. Provide unit complete with UL label; A.S.M.E. Temperature and
pressure relief, and A.S.S.E. Approved vacuum relief.

R. Water Heater (Instant)

1. Instant-flow, tankless Electric Water Heater, 63F rise at 0.5

GPM flow, 4600 watts at 208 volt, 1 phase input.
2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. S-46IL-208-22.
3. Unit shall include 0.5 GPM in line flow control and 1.5 GPM
OMNI Laminar flow faucet flow control.

S. Water Heater (Instant)

1. Instant-flow, tankless Electric Water Heater, 63F rise at 0.5

GPM flow, 4600 watts at 208 volt, 1 phase input.
2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. S-46IL-208-22.
3. Unit shall include 0.5 GPM in line flow control and 1.5 GPM
OMNI Laminar flow faucet flow control.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to plumbing fixtures and equipment provided under this and

other sections of specifications, architectural drawings, and/or
manufacturer's approved shop drawings. Provide rough-in
connections where called for.
B. Follow schedule, details on plans, or manufacturer's approved shop
drawings for connection sizes to fixtures.
C. Connect wall hung urinals to waste piping with red brass nipples.
D. Each fixture, floor drain, and piece of equipment to have separate
trap(s) installed as close to fixtures possible.
E. Provide cast iron P-traps under floor drains.
F. Caulk around joints at fixtures mounted on wall or floor, or
backed up to walls.

3.02 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Install primers under sinks and/or lavatories within wall.

B. Trap primers to have approval of plumbing and drainage institute.
C. Install trap primers in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.

3.03 TESTING AND CLEANING

A. Inspect and test work to insure installation is in accordance with

plans and specifications and is functioning as designed.
B. Correct all deficiencies found and retest.
C. Turn work over to Contracting Officer in a clean, sanitary
condition.

3.15.11 15510 Hydronic Piping

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe and pipe fittings

B. Valves
C. Chilled water piping system.
135-199 6873
5-97
1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09900 - Painting

B. Section 15121 - Expansion Compensation
C. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors
D. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
E. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation.
F. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
G. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME - BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.

B. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - WELDING AND BRAZING QUALIFICATIONS.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - MALLEABLE IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 150 and
300.
D. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - CAST COPPER ALLOY SOLDER JOINT Drainage
Fittings. -DWV.
E. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - WROUGHT COPPER AND WROUGHT COPPER Alloy Solder
Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
F. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - BUILDING SERVICES PIPING.
G. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - BRAZING FILTER METAL.
H. ANSI/AWWA C105 - POLETHYLENE ENCASEMENT FOR DUCTILE Iron Piping
for Water and Other Liquids.
I. ANSI/AWWA C110 - DUCTILE - IRON AND GRAY - IRON FITTINGS 3 IN.
THROUGH 48 IN. FOR WATER AND OTHER Liquids.
J. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-
Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
K. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal
Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.
L. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded
and Seamless.
M. ASTM A120 - Pipe, steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated
(Galvanized), Welded and seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
N. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
O. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve

body.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures; Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9 and
applicable state labor regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and
accessories.
C. Include welders certification of compliance with ANSI/ASME SEC.
9.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

136-199 6873
5-97
 A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labelling in
place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for
sizes 12 inch and over, black.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234,

forged steel welding type.
2. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inch and under: ANSI/AWS D1.1
welded for pipe over 2 inch.

2.02 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 galvanized.

1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ANSI/ASTM B16.3 malleable

iron.
2. Joints: Screwed, or grooved mechanical couplings.

B. Copper Tubing, ASTM B88, Type hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29

solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA ANSI/AWS A5.8, BCuP
silver braze.

2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for
threaded ferrous piping, bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered
joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 inches; 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for
ferrous piping, bronze flanges for copper piping.
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing
clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular
deflection, contraction, and expansion; C-shape elastomer
composition sealing gasket for operating temperature range from
-30 degrees F to 230 degrees F steel bolts, nuts and washers;
galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.

2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GATE VALVES

A. Crane
B. Nibco
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.05 GATE VALVES

A. Up to 2 inches; Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem,

handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc, threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem,
handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged ends.

2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GLOBE VALVES

A. Crane
B. Nibco
137-199 6873
5-97
 C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.07 GLOBE VALVES

A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and

handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, 9 solder
screwed ends, with backseating capacity. Repackable under
pressure.
B. Over 2 inches : Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel,
OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.

2.08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALL VALVES

A. Crane
B. Nibco
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.09 BALL VALVES

A. Up to 2 inches; Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball,

teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing
stops threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches; Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon
seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle,
flanged.

2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PLUG COCKS

A. Crane
B. Nibco
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.11 PLUG COCKS

A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-

lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends, with one wrench
operator for every ten plug cocks.
B. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated,
teflon packing, flanged ends, with wrench operator with set screw.

2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Crane
B. Nibco
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.13 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, screwed ends.

B. Over 2 inches; Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc,
renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

2.14 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RELIEF VALVES

A. Bell & Gossett

B. Watts Regulator Company
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.15 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,

138-199 6873
5-97
 automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and
labelled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building

structure and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with
use of space and other work.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without
stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section
15121.
E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to
valves and fittings.
F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use
eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.
H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building
framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich
primer to welding.
I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish
painting.
J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible

locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus
connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped
system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.
D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment part of
systems, or vertical risers.
E. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control
services.
F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
G. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non- lubricated plug
cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.
H. Provide 3/4 inch gate drain valves at main shut-off valves, low
points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.

3.15.12 15515 Hydronic Specialties

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK RELATED

A. Air Vents
B. Strainers
C. Flow indicators
139-199 6873
5-97
1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D

for manufacturer of tanks.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by

same manufacturer throughout.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and
finishes. Include product description model.

C. Submit inspection certificates for pressure vessels.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01340.

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section

01730.
B. Include installation instruction, assembly views, lubrication
instructions, and replacement parts list.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR VENTS

A. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless

steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating
temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.

2.02 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig
working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel
perforated screen.
B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working
pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated
screen.
C. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working
pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated
screen.

2.03 FLOW INDICATORS

A. Brass construction, threaded for insertion into piping system,

packless, with paddle with removable segments, vapor proof
electrical compartment with switches.
140-199 6873
5-97
2.04 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,

automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and
labelled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

to permit intended performance.
B. Support tanks inside building from building structure in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarge air
collection standpipes.
D. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.
E. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
F. Provide radiator valves on water inlet to terminal heating units
or fan coil unit.
G. Provide radiator balancing valves on water outlet from terminal
heating units or fan coil units.
H. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of
reducing valves, heat exchangers, and compression tanks.
I. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than
make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief
valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.
J. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. K. Where one
line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal
to sum of individual vent areas.

3.15.13 15535 Refrigeration Piping and Specialties

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping
B. Refrigerant
C. Valves
D. Strainers
E. Pressure relief valves

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09900 - Painting

B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation
C. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation
D. Section 15671 - Air Cooled Condensing Units.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.

B. ANSI/ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers.
C. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants.
D. ANSI/ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for
Construction of Pressure Vessels.
E. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, welding and
brazing Qualifications.
141-199 6873
5-97
 F. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings.
G. ANSI/ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper
Tubes.
H. ANSI/ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
I. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
J. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
K. ANSI/ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
L. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
M. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel.
N. ANSI/UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.
O. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
P. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.
Q. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded
and Seamless.
R. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- coated
(galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
S. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
T. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service.

U. MIL-I-631C- (Construction at Solenoid Valve Coils)

V. MIL-V-23450C- Valves, Expansion, Thermostatic, Refrigerant 12 and
Refrigerant 22.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provision of Section 01300.

B. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of system,
including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit product data indicating general assembly of specialties,
including manufacturers catalogue information.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01300.
F. Submit welders certification of compliance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9.
G. Submit design data as a submittal under provisions of Section
01711.
H. Submit data indicating pipe sizing.
I. Submit test reports under provisions of Section 01300.
J. Submit Test reports indicating results of leak test, acid test.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration

accessories on record drawings.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ASNI/ASME B31.9.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers

with labelling in place.
B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating
material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until
installation.
142-199 6873
5-97
PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drain.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper.

2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder Grade 95TA, "ANSI/AWS A5.8 B
Cup silver braze]

B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ANSI/ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.26 cast copper.

2. Joints: Flared.

2.02 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: ANSI/ASHRAE 34;

R-22: Dichlorodifluoromethane
R-21: Monochlorodifluoromethane

2.03 VALVES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: UL listed, globe or angle pattern,

forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel
diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel stainless steel spring,
nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating;
for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of
275 degrees F.

2.04 STAINERS

A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: Brass or steel shell, steel cap
and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless
steel wire or monel reinforced with brass, for maximum working
pressure of 430 psi.

2.05 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Straight Thru or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat,
factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board
Certification NB; for standard 400 psi selected to ANSI/ASHRAE 15.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building
structure, and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with
use of space.
143-199 6873
5-97
 D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and
locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without
stressing pipe, joints or connection equipment.
F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to
valves and fittings.
G. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings.
H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building
frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to
welding.
I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not prefinished,
ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.
J. Insulate piping and equipment refer to Section 15260 and 15280.
K. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
L. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to
Section 16180.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Provide line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.

Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used
install single main liquid line strainer.
B. Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer.
C. Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with
single pump out or pump down compressor control, in liquid line of
single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines
from flooded evaporators to stop flow of il and refrigerant into
the suction line when system shuts down.
D. Provide refrigerant charging valve connections in liquid line
between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final
tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using electronic leak
detector. Test to no leakage.

3.15.14 15540 HVAC Pumps

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Base mounted pumps.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15170 - Motors

B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
C. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation.
D. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping.
E. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and

field performance of pumps with minimum three years experience.
144-199 6873
5-97
 B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified
millwright and alignment certified.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section

1340.
B. Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics
with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve
when applicable.

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section

01730.
B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication
instructions, and replacement parts list.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.

1.08 EXTRA PARTS

A. Provide one extra set of mechanical seals for each size provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Bell & Gossett

B. Weinman

2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically.

B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or
motor connections.
C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise.
Refer to Section 15170.
D. Pump Connections: Flanged.

2.03 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS

A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially

or horizontally split casing, for 175 psig maximum working
pressure.
B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports,
renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection,
drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.
D. Bearings: Grease lubricated roller or ball bearings.
E. Shaft: Stainless steel shaft.
F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary NI-Resist seal, viton
fitted, 250 degrees F for hot-water pumps and Buna fitted 180o F
for chill and condenser water pumps All seals will be John Crane
Type 1.
G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.
H. Baseplate: Fabricated steel with integral drain rim on chill
water pumps.
145-199 6873
5-97
 I. Performance: As Scheduled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less
than minimum as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures
without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in
parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of
midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or
reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is
carried on pump casings
E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into
floor drains.
G. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
H. Install base mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts,
set and level, and grout in place.
I. Qualified millwright shall check, align, and certify base mounted
pumps prior to start-up.
3.15.15 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Condensing unit package

B. Charge of refrigerant and oil
C. Controls and control connections
D. Refrigerant piping connections
E. Motor starters
F. Electrical power connections

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15170 - Motors.

B. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation: Placement of vibration
isolators.
C. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
D. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation.
E. Section 15535 - Refrigeration Piping and Specialties.
F. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical

Refrigeration.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
C. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
D. ANSI/UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories,
Non-Electrical.
E. ANSI/UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing, and
Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.
F. ANSI/UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
G. ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors,
Compressor Units and Condensing Units.
146-199 6873
5-97
 H. ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement
Condensing Units.
I. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 010300.

B. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions,
weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size
of field connections. Include schematic layouts showing
condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and
accessories required for complete system.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section

01700.

B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts

lists, controls, and accessories.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof
mounting frames are in place, ready for immediate installation of
units.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Furnish complete service and maintenance of air cooled condensing

units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating
and maintenance data, including check-out, adjustments, and
recalibrations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier
B. Lennox
C. Trane
D. York

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired

units suitable for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors,
condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil, controls,
liquid receiver and screens.
B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240 and
ANSI/UL 207 and ANSI/UL 303. Testing shall
be in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 90A.
C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than
prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE 90/A.

2.03 CASING

A. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel

panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish.
B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel
147-199 6873
5-97
 provided with full opening access doors. Provide mechanical
interlock to disconnect power when door is opened.
C. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners.

2.04 CONDENSER COILS

A. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper

tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits. Air test under water to
425 psig and dehydrate. Seal with holding charge of refrigerant.
B. Coil Guard: Expanded metal.

2.05 FANS AND MOTORS

A. Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans

with fan guard on discharge. Equip with roller or ball bearings
with grease fittings extended to outside of casing.
B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase
permanent split capacitor or 3 phase, with permanent lubricated
ball bearings and built in current an thermal overload protection.

2.06 COMPRESSORS

A. Construction: Semi-hermetic or hermetic reciprocating type with

heat treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy
connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas
leakage, suction and discharge valves, and sealing surface
immersed in oil.
B. Mounting: Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts and
mount on spring vibration isolators. Internally isolate hermetic
units on springs.
C. Lubrication System: Reversible, positive displacement oil pump
with oil charging valve, oil level sight glass, oil filter, and
magnetic plug or strainer.
D. Motor: Constant speed (1800) (3600) rpm suction gas cooled with
electronic sensor and winding over temperature protection,
designed for across-the-line starting. (Refer to Section 15170).
Furnish with starter.
E. Crankcase Heater: Evaporates refrigerant returning to crankcase
during shutdown. Energize heater when compressor is not
operating.

2.07 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

A. Provide each unit with one refrigerant circuit, factory supplied

and piped.
B. Provide the following for each refrigerant circuit:

1. Filter dryer.
2. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
3. Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating pressure.
4. Insulated suction line.
5. Suction and liquid line service valves and gage ports.

2.08 CONTROLS

A. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250,

containing power and control wiring, molded case disconnect
switch, factory wired with single point power connection.
B. For each compressor, provide part winding starter, non- recycling
compressor overload, starter relay, and control power transformer
or terminal for controls power. Provide manual reset current
148-199 6873
5-97
 overload protection. For each condenser fan, provide across- the-
line starter with starter relay.
C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating
one will shut down machine and require manual reset:

1. High discharge pressure switch manual reset.

2. Low suction pressure switch automatic reset.
3. Oil Pressure switch manual reset.

D. Provide the following operating controls"

1. Thermostat locate in room cycles compressors.

2. One minute off timer prevents compressor from short cycling.
3. Low ambient temperature controls.

E. Provide controls to permit operation down to 20 degrees F ambient

temperature.

1. Thermostat to cycle fan motors in response to outdoor ambient

temperature.
2. Head pressure switch to cycle fan motors in response to
outdoor ambient temperature.
3. Solid state control to vary speed of one condenser fan motor
in response to refrigerant condensing pressure.
4. Electronic control consisting of mixing damper assembly,
controlled to maintain constant refrigerant condensing pressure.

F. Provide low voltage, adjustable thermostat to control heating

stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor stages
and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. See Section
15974.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section
16180.
C. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators.
Refer to Section 15535. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15.

3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare start systems under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Provide initial and cooling season start-up, and winter season
shut down during first year of operation, including routine
servicing and check out.
C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant
circuit. Replace losses of refrigerant and oil.

3.15.16 15682 Air Cooled Water Chiller

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDED

A. Chiller package.
B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Controls and control connections.
D. Chilled water connections.
149-199 6873
5-97
 E. Starters.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15170 - Motors.

B. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation.
C. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping.
D. Section 15535 - Refrigeration Piping and Specialties.
E. Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps.
F. Section 15970 - Controls.
G. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
H. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical
characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ARI 590 - Reciprocating Water - Chilling Packages.

B. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
C. ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
D. ASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
F. UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights
and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field
connections. Indicate valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves
required for complete system.
C. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, specialties and
accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that components of package
not furnished by manufacturer have been selected in accordance
with manufacturer's requirements.

1.06 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Procedures for

submittals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions,
maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include
trouble-shooting guide.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in

manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum
three years documented experience.

1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide certification of inspection for conforming authority

having jurisdiction.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified
by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. As suitable for the purpose
150-199 6873
5-97
 specified and indicated.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store,

and protect products.
B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging,
unloading, and transporting units.
C. Protect units from physical damage.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete assembly including
materials and labor.

1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Provide service and maintenance of complete assembly
for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Provide two containers of lubricating oil and refrigerant.

1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Provide two containers of lubricating oil and refrigerant.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier
B. Trane
C. York

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Provide factory assembled and tested outdoor air cooled liquid

chillers consisting of compressors, condenser, evaporator, thermal
expansion valve, refrigeration accessories, and control panel.
Construction, testing, and ratings shall be in accordance with ARI
590.
B. Conform to UL 465 code for construction of reciprocating water
chillers and provide UL label.
C. Conform to ASME SEC 8 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
construction and testing of reciprocating water chillers.
D. Conform to ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water
chillers.

2.03 SEMI-HERMETIC COMPRESSORS

A. Reciprocating Compressors:

1. Unit: Serviceable hermetic reciprocating motor- compressor

with positive displacement oil pump lubrication system, crankcase
heater, suction inlet screen, discharge service valves and control
151-199 6873
5-97
 panel.
2. Automatic Capacity Reduction Equipment: Suction valve
unloaders with lifting mechanism solenoid operated. Provide for
unloaded compressor start.
3. Motor: Constant speed 1800 rpm, suction gas cooled with
electronic overheating protection in each phase, reduced voltage
starting.
4. Crankcase Heater: Energize when compressor is not operating.
5. Controls:

A. Starter: Part winding, with manual reset current overload

protection, starter relay, control power transformer,
terminal strip for connection to interface equipment.
B. Safety Controls: Manually reset, adjustable high and low
pressure cutouts, low oil pressure cutout.
C. Panel Face: Compressor run light, start-stop switch,
circuit breaker, demand limit switch, elapsed time meter,
crankcase heater start- stop switch and light.

2.04 EVAPORATOR

A. Provide shell and tube type evaporator, seamless or welded steel

construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless
copper tubes sheets. Provide multiple refrigerant circuits on
multiple compressor units.
B. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 225 psig working
pressure and water side for 150 psig working pressure, in
accordance with ASME SEC 8.
C. Insulate with 0.75 inch minimum thick flexible expanded polyvinyl
chloride insulation with maximum K value of 0.28. Provide heat
tape to protect evaporator to -20 degrees F.
D. Provide water drain connection and thermometer wells for
temperature controller and low temperature cutout.

2.05 CONDENSERS

A. Construct condenser coils of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to

seamless copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits with liquid
accumulators. Air test under water to 425 psig.
B. Provide vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser
fans with fan guard on discharge. Equip with roller or ball
bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of casing.
Provide factory mounted, louvered, galvanized steel coil guard
panels with lint screens.
C. Provide fan motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings and
built-in current and overload protection. Refer to Section 15170.

2.06 ENCLOSURES

A. House components in galvanized steel panels with weather

resistant, baked enamel finish.
B. Mount starters and disconnects in NEMA ICS 6 weatherproof panel
provided with full opining access doors. Provide mechanical
interlock to disconnect power when door is opened.

2.07 CONTROLS

A. On chiller, mount NEMA ICS 6 weatherproof steel control panel,

containing in starters power and control wiring, molded case
disconnect switch, factory wired with single point power
connection.
152-199 6873
5-97
 B. For each compressor, provide part winding starter, non- recycling
compressor overload, starter relay, and control power transformer
or terminal for controls power. Provide manual reset current
overload protection.

C. Provide safety controls with indicating lights arranged so any one

will shut down machine and require manual reset:

1. Low chilled water temperature switch.

2. High discharge pressure switch for each compressor>
3. Low suction pressure switch for each compressor.
4. Oil pressure switch.
5. Flow switch in chilled water line.
6. Relay for remote mounted emergency shut-down switch.

D. Provide operating controls:

1. Multi-step chilled water temperature controller with cycles

2. Termination for connection to controls system to cycle
compressors; refer to Section 15970.
3. Five minute off timer prevents compressor from short cycling.
4. Periodic pump-out timer to pump down on chilled water flow and
high evaporator refrigerant pressure.
5. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high
return water temperature.
6. Low ambient control consisting of external damper assembly,
controls head pressure for operation down to 0 degrees F.
7. Hot gas bypass sized for minimum compressor loading "on one
compressor only], bypasses hot refrigerant gas to evaporator.

E. Provide pre-piped gage board with pressure gages for suction and
discharge refrigerant pressures, and oil pressures for each
compressor.

2.08 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Electrical Characteristics:

1. As Scheduled
2. Refer to Section 16180.

B. Motor: Refer to Section 15170.

C. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment
under provisions of Section 16180.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Align chiller package on steel or concrete foundations.
C. Connect to electrical service. Refer to Section 16180.
D. Connect to chilled water piping. Refer to Section 1551.

1. On inlet, provide:

A. Thermometer well for temperature controller.

B. Thermometer well for temperature limit controller.
C. Flexible pipe connecter.
D. Shut-off valve.

153-199 6873
5-97
 2. On outlet, provide:

A. Flexible pipe connecter.

B. Shut-off valve.

E. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning.

3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Prepare and start systems.

B. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Section 01700 Contract Closeout: Demonstrating installed work.

B. Demonstrate system operation and verify specified performance.
Refer to Section 15990.

3.15.17 15785 Computer Room Air Conditioning

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Air conditioning units.

B. Controls and control panels.

1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation: Installation and

wiring of thermostats and control components.
B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring System: Installation and wiring
of thermostats and control components.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 10270 - Access Flooring.

B. Section 15170 - Motors: Evaporator fan motors.
C. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to
units.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum).
B. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation
Systems.
C. AHRAE 52 - Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter.
D. FS TT-C-490 - Cleaning Method and Pretreatment of Ferrous Surfaces
for Organic Coatings.
E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A for the installation of computer room air

conditioning units.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

154-199 6873
5-97
 A. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products
and assemblies required for this project.
B. Indicate water, drain, electrical, rough-in connections on shop
drawings or product data.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of section 01300.

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section

01700.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and
repair data.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of

Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of entire unit.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide on sets of filters under provisions of Section 01700.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Liebert

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Provide packaged, water cooled, factory assembled, pre- wired and

pre-piped unit, consisting of cabinet, fans filters, humidifier,
controls.
B. Assemble unit for down-flow air delivery, in draw- through
configuration.

2.03 CABINET AND FRAME

A. Structural Frame: 14 gauge welded steel suitable braced for

rigidity, capable of supporting compressors and other mechanical
equipment and fittings welded tubular steel floor stand with
adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads.
B. Doors and Access Panels: 18 gage galvanized steel wit
polyurethane gaskets, hinges to allow removal of panels, and
concealed fastening devices.
C. Inulation: Thermally and acoustically line cabinet interior with
one inch thick acoustic duct liner.
D. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: FS TT-C-490 prepared, baked-on
textured vinyl enamel; color as selected.

2.04 EVAPORATOR FANS AND MOTORS

A. Fans: Double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fans, statically

and dynamically balanced, on steel shaft with self-aligning grease
lubricated ball bearings, and V-belt drive.
B. Motor: Refer to section 15170 - Motors. Drip proof, permanently
lubricated ball bearing motor with built-in current and overload
protection.
155-199 6873
5-97
 C. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced,
keyed, variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave, minimum of two
matched belts, drive rated minimum 2.0 times nameplate rating of
motor.

2.05 CHILLED WATER COIL

A. Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with three way
modulated valve.

2.06 FILTERS

A. Media: Pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton fabric;

supported and bonded to welded wire grid; enclosed in cardboard
frame; 2 inch nominal thickness.
B. Rating: ASHRAE 52; 25-30 percent dust spot efficiency, 90-92
percent weight arrestance; 500 ft/min face velocity, 0.30 inch WG
initial resistance, 2.0 inch WG recommended final resistance.
C. Manufactures:

1. American Air Filter (AAF).

2. FARR.

2.07 HUMIDIFIER

A. Infrared Type: High intensity quartz lamps mounted above

stainless steel evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting
water, drain, or electrical connections; pre-piped and utilizing
condensate water from cooling coils with stainless steel or brass
float valve mechanism; located in bypass air stream; with flush
cycle timer and solenoid drain valve.

2.08 ELECTRICAL PANEL

A. Service Connections, Wiring, and Disconnect Requirements: Conform

to Section 16180.
B. Control Cabinet: NEMA 250; Type 2 enclosure, UL listed, with
piano hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters
with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and
fusible control circuit transformer.
C. Disconnect Switch: Non-automatic molded case circuit breaker with
handle accessible with panel closed and capable of preventing
access until switched to "off" position.

2.09 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Logic Circuitry: Microprocessor shall continuously monitor

operation of process cooling system; continuously digitally
display room temperature and room relative humidity; sound alarm
on system malfunction and simultaneously display problem. When
more than one malfunction occurs, flash fault in sequence with
room temperature, remember alarm even when malfunction cleared,
and continue to flash fault until reset.
B. Malfunctions: Power Loss, Loss of Air Flow, Clogged Air Filter,
High Room Temperature, Low Room Temperature, High Humidity, Low
Humidity, Smoke/Fire, Water-Under Floor, and Supply Fan Overload.
C. Light Emitting Diodes Display: Control Power On, System On,
Humidification.
D. Provide push buttons to STOP process cooling system, START process
cooling system, SILENCE audible alarm, push-to-test LED
indicators, and display room relative humidity.
156-199 6873
5-97
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that flooring system is ready to receive work and opening

dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate installation of computer room air conditioning units
with computer room raised floor installer.
C. Provide adequate drainage connections for water cooled units,
condensate, and humidifier flushing system.
D. Provide shut-off valves in condenser water inlet and outlet piping
on water cooled units.

3.15.18 15835 Terminal Heat Transfer Units

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDED

A. Electric Heaters.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16170 - Motors.

B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical
characteristics and wiring connections. Installation of room
thermostats. Electrical supply to units.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including
arrangements.
C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and

reinforcing, and typical elevations.
2. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically
indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure,
corner pieces, and caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster
covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat
output provided.
3. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and
requirements.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions
and recommendations.
157-199 6873
5-97
1.06 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers descriptive
literature, operating instructions, installation instructions,
maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been
completed in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in

manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum
three years documented experience.

1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified

by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. As suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacturers warranty for unit heater.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturer: As Scheduled.
B. Assembly: UL listed and labelled assembly with terminal box and
cover, and built-in controls.
C. Heating Elements: Exposed helical coil of nickel- chrome
resistance wire with refractory ceramic support bushings.
D. Cabinet: 18 gage steel with easily removed front panel with
integral air outlet and inlet grilles.
E. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type
providing unrestricted longitudinal movement, on enclosure
brackets.
F. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically
balanced, with fan guard.
G. Motor: Permanently lubricated, sleeve bearings for horizontal
models, ball bearings for vertical models.
H. Control: Separate fan speed switch and thermostat heat selector
switch, factory wired, with switches build-in behind cover.
Provide thermal overload.
I. Electrical Characteristics:

1. As Scheduled.
2. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch.
3. Refer to Section 16180.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and
ceiling are finished and painted. Avoid damage.
C. Protection: Provide finished cabinet units with protective covers
158-199 6873
5-97
 during balance of construction.
D. Unit Heaters: Hang from building structure, with pipe hangers
anchored to building, not from piping. Mount as recommended by
manufacturer to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by
manufacturer but not factory-mounted. Furnish copy of
manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. Install electrical
wiring in accordance with manufacturer's submittals and Section
16180.

3.02 CLEANING

A. After construction is complete, including painting, clean exposed

surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.
B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory- finished
cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.

3.15.19 15855 Air Handling Units

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Modular air handling units.

B. Heating coils. (Electric)
C. Filter sections
D. Cooling coils

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15121 - Expansion Compensation.

B. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation.
C. Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation.
D. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping: Equipment drains.
E. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
F. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories: Flexible duct connections.
G. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical
Characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
E. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
F. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Moving Devices.
G. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
H. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air Cooling and Air- Heating Coils.
I. ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
J. ARI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
K. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
M. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.
N. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01400.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight
159-199 6873
5-97
 loading, required clearances, construction details, field
connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
C. Product Data:

1. Provide literature which indicates dimensions, weights,

capacities, ratings, fan performance, gages and finishes of
materials, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
2. Provide data of filter media, filter performance data, filter
assembly, and filter frames.
3. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly
plotted.
4. Submit sound power level data for both fan outlet and casing
radiation at rated capacity.
5. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring
including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring,
clearly indicating factory- installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter
replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and
wiring diagrams.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under

provisions of Section 01600.
B. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective
containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting
lugs. Inspect for damage.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction
traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components,
enclosures, and finish.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent,

until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Provide one set for each unit of fan belts and filters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier
160-199 6873
5-97
 B. York
C. McQuay

2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Configuration: Fabricate with fan and coil section plus

accessories, including:

1. Heating coil. (Electric)

2. Filter section.
3. Cooling coil section.

B. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.

C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.

2.03 CASING

A. Construction: Fabricate on channel base and drain pan of welded

steel coated externally with manufacturers standard paint finish.
Assemble sections with gaskets and bolts.

1. Outside Casing:

a. Galvanized Steel

2. Inside Casing

a. Stainless Steel

3. Floor Plate

a. Stainless Steel

B. Insulation: 1 inch thick, 1-1/2 lbs per cu ft kg per cu m density

neoprene coated, glass fiber insulation, "K" value at 75 degrees F
maximum 0.26 BTU/inch/sq ft/degrees f/hr, applied to internal
surfaces with adhesive and weld pins. Coat exposed edges of
insulation with adhesive.
C. Finish: Baked enamel - Asphalt base coating formulated to protect
surfaces, seal seams and joints, and provide insulation and sound
deadening.
D. Inspection Doors: 10 x 10 inch of galvanized steel for flush
mounting, with gasket, latch, and handle assembly and 1/4 inch
thick plexiglass inspection window. Provide welded channel frame
to set door out from casing to permit external insulation.
E. Drain Pans: Construct from double thickness galvanized steel with
insulation between layers with welded corners. Cross break and
pitch to drain connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil
section with asphalt base coating.

2.04 FANS

A. Type: Forward curved, single width, single inlet, centrifugal

Vane axial type fan.
B. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified
Rating Seal.
C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA
Certified Sound Rating Seal.
D. Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller
bearings with lubrication fittings extended to exterior of casing
with copper tube and grease fitting rigidly attached to casing.
161-199 6873
5-97
 E. Mounting: Locate motor, drive, and belt guard on integral casing
framework on exterior of casing. Provide ventilated weather cover
of galvanized steel completely enclosing motor and drive with
tachometer opening. Mount casing on vibration isolators.
F. Flexible Connection: Separate fan and coil sections; refer to
Section 15910.

2.05 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Bearings: AFBMA 9, L-50 life at 100,000 hours, heavy duty pillow

block type, self-aligning, grease- lubricated ball bearings, or
AFBMA 11, L-50 life at 400,000 hours pillow block type, self-
aligning, grease- lubricated roller bearings.
B. Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-
way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.
C. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced,
bored to fit shafts and keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch
sheaves for motors 15 hp and under selected so required rpm is
obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fixed sheave for 20 hp
and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by
manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor.
D. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Standard; 12 gage thick, 3/4 inch
diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without
short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for
adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.

2.06 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Electrical Characteristics:

1. As Scheduled
2. Refer to Section 16180.

B. Motor: Open drip proof TEFC. Refer to Section 15170.

C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch
circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated.
Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

2.07 COILS

A. Casing: Provide access to both sides of coils. Enclose coils

with headers and return bends fully contained within casing.
Slide coils into casing through removable end panel with blank off
sheets and sealing collars at connection penetrations.
B. Drain Pans: 24 inch downstream of coil and down spouts for
cooling coil banks more than one coil high.
C. Eliminators: Three break of Type 304 stainless steel, mounted
over drain pan.
D. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection
procedures in accordance with ARI 410.
E. Fabrication:

1. Tubes: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper expanded into fins, brazed

joints.
2. Fins: Aluminum.
3. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel.

F. Water Cooling Coils:

162-199 6873
5-97
 1. Headers: Cast iron, seamless copper tube, or prime coated
steel pipe with brazed joints.
2. Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and
vent; threaded plugs in return bends and in headers opposite each
tube.

G. Electric Coils:

1. Assembly: UL 1096 listed and labelled, with terminal control

box and hinged cover, splice box, coil, casing, and controls.
2. Coil: Exposed helical coil.
3. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel.

H. Controls: Automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in magnetic

contactors, control circuit transformer and fuse, manual reset
thermal cut-out, air flow proving device, fused disconnect, load
fuses.

2.08 FILTERS

A. Filter Box: Section with filter guides, access doors from both
sides, for side loading.
B. Filter Media: UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II, approved by
local authorities.
C. Flat: Arrangement with 2 inch disposable panel filters.

D. Renewable Media: Section with vertical filters with manual

control and auxiliary frame for extended surface retained media
filters. Refer to Section 15885.
E. Extended Surface: Filter box with holding frames and blank-off
sheets, extended surface retained media filters with 50 percent
dust spot efficiency. Refer to Section 15885.
F. Filter Gauges: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in
metal case, 2inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case,
One piece molded plastic inclined manometer, with static pressure
tips.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in conformance with ARI 435.

3.15.20 15870 Power Ventilators

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall exhausters.
B. Cabinet exhaust fans.
C. Ceiling exhaust fans.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15170 - Motors

B. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolators.
C. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
D. Section 15910 - Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.
E. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical
163-199 6873
5-97
 characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
C. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA
Certified Ratings Seal.
D. AMCA 300 - Test code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
E. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving
Devices.
F. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
H. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and
Grease Vapors from Commercial cooking Equipment.
I. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan
curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power
levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and
drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Provide two sets of belts for each fan.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WALL EXHAUSTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Loren Cook
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

A. Greenheck
B. Penn

B. Performance

1. As scheduled

C. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with spun aluminum

housing; resiliently mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 16 gage
aluminum bird screen.
D. Electrical Characteristics and Components

1. Electrical Characteristics

a. As scheduled
164-199 6873
5-97
 b. Refer to Section 16180.

2. Motor: Refer to Section 15170.

3. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch
circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated.
Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
4. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible in housing for
thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted solid state
speed controller.

E. Backdraft Damper: Gravity activated, aluminum multiple blade

construction, felt edged with nylon bearings.
F. Sheaves: For V-belt drives, provide cast iron or steel,
dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and
adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is
obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self
aligning pre- lubricated ball bearings.

2.03 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cook
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

A. Greenheck
b. Penn

B. Performance: As Scheduled.
C. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized
steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic insulation, resilient
mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
D. Electrical Characteristics and Components

1. Electrical Characteristics:

A. As Scheduled.
B. Refer to Section 16180.

2. Motor: Refer to Section 15170.

3. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch
circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated.
Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
4. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal
overlaod protected motor and wall mounted switch or solid state
speed controller.

E. Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel

finish.
F. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit
shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves
selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set mid-
position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball
bearings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure wall exhausters with stainless steel lag screws to
165-199 6873
5-97
 structure.
C. Extend ducts to wall exhausters into structure. Counterflash duct
to wall opening.
D. Install flexible connections specified in Section 15910 between
fan inlet and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are
parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while
running.
E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance F. Install
backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters.
G. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling
exhauster fans and as indicated.
H. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean,
filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run
under observation.

3.15.21 15890 Ductwork

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Low pressure ducts.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE - Handbook 1981 Fundamentals: Chapter 33 - Duct Design.

B. ASHRAE - Handbook 1983 Equipment: Chapter 1 - Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A900 - Weight of Coating on Zinc Coated galvanized Steel
Articles.
D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip.
E. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated
(galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process.
F. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip
Process, Lock Forming Quality.
G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
H. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems.
I. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
J. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain

sizes inside lining.
B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 1/2 inch WG
positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than
2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and
velocities less than 2,500 fpm and 2 inch WG positive or negative
static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds,

and configuration prior to start of work for low pressure systems.

166-199 6873
5-97
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class

1 air duct materials, or UL 181.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-
forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq. Ft. For
each side in conformance with ASTM A90.
C. Flexible Ducts: Fabric supported by helically wound spring steel
wire or flat steel bands; rated to 2 inches WG positive and 1.5
inches WG negative for low pressure ducts.
D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible
glass fiber insulation, enclosed by seamless aluminum pigmented
plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees
F.
E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
F. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive,
compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape,
or heavy mastic.
G. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized, threaded both ends, threaded one
end, or continuously threaded.
H. All rigid round duct shall be galvanized steel spiral shop
fabricated duct.

2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct

Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated.
Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing and sealing for
operating pressures indicated.
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in
accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round
ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted
except by written permission.
C. Construct T's, bends and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2
times width of duct on centerline. Where no possible and where
rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where
acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes or
perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence
wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not
exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45
degrees.
E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with
piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct
area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes
8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.
H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

2.03 EXTERIOR DUCTWORK

A. All Ductwork exposed to external weather conditions to be

Galvanized Sheet metal construction.
B. All joints to be Hardcast.
C. Provide Ductwork Supports 5'-0" on center (Max).

PART 3 EXECUTION

167-199 6873
5-97
3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and

installation of glass fiber ductwork at beginning of installation.
B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate
thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where
required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where
openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation
material inside a metal ring.
C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow
normal operating and maintenance activities.
D. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum length
of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp.
E. All diffuser branch ducts in excess of 6 feet in length shall
utilize rigid round duct.

3.02 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL

Low Pressure Supply Steel

(Heating Systems)

Low Pressure Supply Steel

(System with Cooling Coils)

Return and Relief Steel

General Exhaust Steel

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to
remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the
system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by
excessive dirt with temporary filters or bypass during cleaning.
B. Clean duct systems and high power vacuum machines. Protect
equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or
bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for
cleaning purposes.

3.15.22 15910 Ductwork Accessories

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Volume control dampers.

B. Fire dampers.
C. Backdraft dampers
D. Air turning devices.
E. Flexible duct connectors.
F. Duct access doors.
G. Duct test holes.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NEPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems.
B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
168-199 6873
5-97
 C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated,

including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test
holes. Provide product data for hardware used.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, for fire dampers
and combination fire and smoke dampers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction

Standards, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24
inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes
over 24 inches.
C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to
streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod.
Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning,
universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw.
D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 48 inch.
E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum
blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades
in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable
hardware.
F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide and
bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil- impregnated
nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and
multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide
regulator at both ends.
H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand- off
mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.

2.02 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as

indicated.
B. Fabricate ceiling firestop flaps of galvanized steel, 22 gage
frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top
side, with locking clip.
C. Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame,
stainless steel closure spring, and light weight, heat retardant
non-asbestos fabric blanket closure.
D. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with
interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and
latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out
of air stream except for low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in
height.
E. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers with 16 gage galvanized
steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel
sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated
steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade
stops, and lock.
F. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide
adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers.

169-199 6873
5-97
2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.

A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller,

furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment
manufacturers standard construction.
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft
dampers of galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum
6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked
together in rattle- free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball
bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit
setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.04 AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel

or aluminum construction; with
mounting straps.
B. Multi-blade device with radius
and bracket, steel or aluminum
operator strap.
individually adjustable blades,
blades attached to pivoting frame
construction, with push-pull

2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction

Standards, and as indicated.
B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric
to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 2
inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
C. Leaded vinyl sheet, minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft.,
10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.

2.06 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction

Standards and as indicated.
B. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with
sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For
insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with
sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with
sash locks.
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches
square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and
inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an
additional hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.08 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with

neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or
twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight
flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings
to clear insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

170-199 6873
5-97
 A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply,
return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger
ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only
where indicated.
C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and
outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required
perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections,
corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having
jurisdiction and Owner's representative.
E. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest
to outside and where indicated.
F. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in
ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment.
G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and
after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers,
and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for
hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as
indicated.
H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing
and balancing purposes.

3.15.23 15936 Air Outlets and Inlets

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Perforated Face Ceiling Diffusers.

B. Ceiling Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers - Wall Registers/Grilles.
D. Wall Supply Registers/Grilles.
E. Louvers

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
D. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
E. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance
of Outlets and Inlets.
F. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance

with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data for items required for this project.

B. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size,
171-199 6873
5-97
 location, application, and noise level.
C. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and
type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of
outlets and inlets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Metalaire
B. Titus
C. Krueger

2.02 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face;

as scheduled.
B. Provide surface mount or inverted T-bar type frame. In plaster
ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.
C. Fabricate of all extruded aluminum and baked enamel off-white
finish.
D. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing
grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face.

2.03 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing, with

spring or other device to set blades, vertical face; Model as
scheduled.
B. Perforated plate, ductless return grille, as scheduled.
Frame for Ceiling type as noted on architectural sheet.
C. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting
or frame for inverted T-Bar ceiling.
D. Fabricate of extruded aluminum with 20 gage minimum frames and 22
gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked
enamel finish.
E. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide
integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key
operator, operable from face.

2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Airline
B. Ruskin
C. Nailor Hart

2.05 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which

exceeds 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to
set blades, vertical face, double deflection; as scheduled.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting
and gasket.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage
minimum blades, aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum
extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with
removable key operator, operable from face.

2.06 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

172-199 6873
5-97
 A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing, with
spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face; as
scheduled.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames with 22 gage
minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or
aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide
integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key
operator, operable from face.

2.07 LOUVERS

A. Provide 6 inch deep louvers with blades on 45 degree slope heavy

channel frame, birdscreen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust
and 3/4 inch for intake.
B. Fabricate of 12 gage extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with
factory prime coat finish.
C. Furnish with exterior flat flange for installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary
adjustments in position to conform with architectural features,
symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and
grills and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified
as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

3.02 AIR OUTLET AND INLET SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS

3.15.24 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and

Instrumentation, Total System Balance.
B. ASHRAE - 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing.
C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting
of Environmental Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within

30 days after award of Contract.
B. Submit test reports as a submittal under provisions of Section
01340.
C. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating
173-199 6873
5-97
 adjusting, balancing and equipment data required.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance
of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for
inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals,
complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover
identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings
with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data
sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms prior to
commencing system balance.

1.04 REPORT FORMS

A. Submit reports on NEBB forms. Submit data in IP.

B. Forms shall include the following information:

1. Title Page:

A. Company name
b. Company address
c. Company telephone number
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Architect
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
i. Project altitude

2. Instrument List:

A. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date

3. Air Moving Equipment:

A. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Return air flow, specified and actual
f. Outside air flow, specified and actual
g. Total static pressure, total external static pressure
specified and actual
h. Inlet pressure
i. Discharge pressure
j. Fan RPM

4. Exhaust Fan Data:

A. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Total static pressure, total external static
pressure specified and actual f. Inlet pressure
g. Discharge pressure
174-199 6873
5-97
 h. Fan RPM

5. Air Distribution Test Sheet:

A. Air terminal number

b. Room number/location
c. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow
j. Percent of design air flow

6. Cooling Coil Data:

A. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.
J. Water flow, design and actual
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
o. Air pressure drop, design and actual

7. Chillers:

A. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Capacity
d. Model number
e. Serial number
f. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
g. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
h. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
i. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
j. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
l. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual

8. Electric Duct Heater:

A. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Design kW
f. Number of stages
g. Phase, voltage, amperage
h. Test voltage (each phase)
i. Test amperage (each phase)
j. Air flow, specified and actual
k. Temperature rise, specified and actual
175-199 6873
5-97
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 01730.

B. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough
setting.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and

balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three
years documented experience. Perform Work under supervision of
NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.
B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with NEBB
Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of
Environmental Systems.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule

completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and

operable. Ensure the following:

1. All equipment has been started and checked by respective

equipment manufacturer's start up procedure, installation
meets all manufacturer's requirements.
2. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.
3. Temperature control systems are installed complete and
operable.
4. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical
equipment.
5. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install
temporary media in additions to final filters.
6. Duct systems are clean of debris.
7. Correct fan rotation.
8. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
9. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
10. Access door are closed and cut end caps are in place.
11. Air outlets are installed and connected.
12. Duct system leakage has been minimized.
13. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled and vented.
14. Correct pump rotation.
15. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
16. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or

conditions which prevent system balance.
C. If, for design reason, systems cannot be properly balanced, report
as soon as observed.
D. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

176-199 6873
5-97
3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting and balancing

operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to
facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply

systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return, and exhaust
systems from figures indicated.
B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design
conditions indicated.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work as required to balance within stated tolerances.

B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed
condition.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers and other adjustment
devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory
stops.
D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been
disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards,
closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes,
and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in
report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the
Owner.
G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final
acceptance and submit report.

3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required

or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of
entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures
free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to
extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or
sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such
as dampers and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds.
Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by
damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual quantities
recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units,
including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure
across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of
filters.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and
exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and
exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and
177-199 6873
5-97
 exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each
to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.

3.06 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings
and pressure gages to determine flow rates for system balance.
Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance
on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in
the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows
through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform
balancing by measurements of temperature differential in
conjunction with air balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to
heat transfer elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of
balancing cocks, valves and fittings. Do not use service or shut-
off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements
or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated
by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

3.16 ELECTRICAL

3.16.1 16100 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION: Division 1 applies to this Section. Provide

electrical work, complete.

A. Work In This Section: Principal items include:

1. All electrical connections to equipment furnished under other

sections of these specifications or by Owner.
2. Tests of entire system.
3. Guarantees.
4. All anchors, sleeves and supports for electrical equipment.
5. All electrical wiring, conduits, boxes, junction boxes,
convenience outlets, switches, switch boxes, plates and all
miscellaneous items of electrical equipment, apparatus and
material specified and/or shown on the drawings.
6. Record drawings.
7. All required grounds.
8. Temporary electric service for construction including adequate
lighting.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Codes: Construction shall be in accordance with the following

codes:

1. Regulations of the Local Fire Marshal.

2. National Fire Protection Association, the National Electric
Code, Latest Edition.
3. Local codes and ordinances.
4. Nothing in these plans and specifications is to be construed
as permitting work not conforming with above codes, ordinances,
and regulations. If any changes are necessary in the drawings or
178-199 6873
5-97
 specifications to make the work comply with these requirements,
notify the Contracting Officer for clarification.
B. Permits, Fees and Inspections: Obtain and pay for all necessary
plan checks, permits for electrical work required by any
constituted public authorities having jurisdiction including
utilities. Arrange and pay for all required inspections or
examinations and deliver certificates of inspections to the
Contracting Officer. Pay all utility companies' charges.
C. Record Drawings: Refer to Section 01720 for procedures.
D. Locations and Accessibility:

1. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired location or

arrangement of conduit runs, outlets, equipment, etc., and are to
be followed as closely as possible. Execute the work to secure
the installation in the available space and to minimize space
limitations and interference of structural conditions.
2. Install conduit and equipment in a manner and in locations
avoiding all obstructions, preserving headroom, keeping openings
and passageways clear and readily accessible for maintenance and
repairs. Make changes in locations of conduit or equipment in
coordination with equipment actually supplied under this Section
and by other Sections or Owner as necessary to accomplish this.

E. Verification of Dimensions: All scaled and figured dimensions are

approximate. Check and verify all dimensions and sizes for the
fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of the equipment
and to the structure. Where apparatus and equipment have been
indicated on the drawings, dimensions have been taken from
equipment of the class indicated. Verify that the equipment
contemplated will fit into the spaces provided.
F. Cooperation with Others: Organize the work of this Section such
that progress of the total work may proceed as expeditiously as
possible.
G. Cleaning Equipment and Premises: Thoroughly clean all parts of
the materials and equipment. Exposed parts shall be thoroughly
cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials, and all oil and
grease spots shall be removed with a non-flammable cleaning
solvent. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks
and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully
brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and
left smooth and clean. During the progress of the work, keep the
area clean, leave the premises and all portions of the building
free from debris.
H. Tests: Furnish the necessary equipment and personnel to perform
all required tests of the work for approval. All wiring and
connections shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and
improper grounds in accordance with the requirements of the
National Electrical or local code. Each individual power circuit
shall be tested at the panel with the power equipment connected
for proper operation. Failures shall be corrected in a manner
satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Pay all costs of tests
including costs of correcting failures and of replacing or
repairing any damage to associated work or surrounding areas
resulting therefrom.
I. Miscellaneous Metal Work: All miscellaneous iron work required to
complete and properly install the electrical work shall be
furnished and installed under this section of the specifications.
This shall include all supports, etc.
J. Acceptance: Demonstrate to the Contracting Officer that the
entire installation is complete and in proper operating condition.
K. Project Closeout:
179-199 6873
5-97
 1. Submit evidence of electrical inspector's final approval.
2. Submit approved record drawings.

L. Labeling:

1. All circuit breakers, switches, circuits and panelboards shall

be clearly and permanently labeled with bakelite nameplates
indicating their exact function.
2. All motor starters, disconnects, pull boxes, junction boxes
and equipment shall be likewise identified as to circuit, voltage,
function and destination: I.e., "RTU-1 P2-1, 480 volts.

M. Completing Work: At completion of work, remove all waste

materials and debris, and leave site in a complete and
satisfactory condition.
N. Electrical Superintendent: All work of this section shall be
under the supervision of an experienced electrical superintendent
and Master Electrician licensed in the City of El Paso.
O. Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Refer to Section 01080.

1. Data for manuals should be compiled upon approval of material

list and sketches, so as not to delay final approval of the work
installed. Operating manuals shall contain all pertinent data
relating to the electrical installation such as fixture cut
sheets, manufacturers approved drawings, sketches, wiring diagrams
and equipment operating instructions.
2. Each set shall be bound in a durable hard board binder and
indexed.
3. Owner's operating personnel shall be instructed as to
electrical operating procedures.

P. Cutting and Patching: Provide information on openings required

for the work of this Section. All cutting and patching required
shall comply with requirements of Section 01045.

Q. All materials utilized in supply or return air plenums shall be

steel, aluminum, or other plenum rated material conforming to
25/50-Flame/Smoke production tests performed by an independent
testing agency in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Sk 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(Not Used On This Section)

PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used On This Section)

3.16.2 16111 Conduit

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal conduit
B. Flexible metal conduit
180-199 6873
5-97
 C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing
E. Fittings and conduit bodies.
F. Non Metallic Conduit Type PVC.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16130 - Boxes

B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding
C. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Electric Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.

B. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum conduit.
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Metal Boxes, and conduit bodies for
Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NEMA TC3 - PVC Fittings for use with rigid PVC Conduit.
F. EMT and Fittings.

1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70 (NEC) and applicable local

requirements.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NEC/ANSI/NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.

B. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit.

C. Dry Locations:

1. Concealed: Use or Electrical Metallic Tubing or rigid

galvanized steel conduit.
2. Exposed: Use Rigid galvanized steel, or Electrical Metallic
condit.

D. Underground: Use Rigid steel or Schedule 80 PVC.

2.02 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.2.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1: Material to match
conduit.

2.03 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

181-199 6873
5-97
 A. Install conduit in accordance with NEC.
B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring
installation.
C. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping, to allow
piping joint make-up without affecting conduit.
D. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with
temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
E. Cut conduit square using saw; de-burr cut ends.
F. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings: Fasten securely.
G. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes.
H. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between
boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as
around beams.
I. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at
low boxes in conduit system.
J. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of
dirt and moisture.
K. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
L. Make connections to equipment with sealtite conduits with PVC
Jackets.
M. Provide separate conduit system for controls.

3.16.3 16120 Conductors

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.03 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conductors.
B. Wiring connections and terminations.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BUILDING WIRE

A. Thermoplastic-insulated Building Wire: NEMA 5.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded
conductor, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN, XHHW.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor,
600 volt insulation, rated 75 Type NM.
D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation,
THHN.

PART 3 EXECUTION
182-199 6873
5-97
3.01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS

A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits,
and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring.
B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home
runs longer than 75 feet (23 m), and for 20 ampere, 277 volt
branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet (61 m).
C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in
same raceway or cable.
D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and
panelboards.
F. Make Conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.

3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS

A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL

listed wire pulling lubricate for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires.
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been
physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work
likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing
conductors.

3.03 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.

B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for
copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and
smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.
C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG
and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with
electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of
conductor.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of
conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of

Section 01400.
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to
manufacturer's recommended values.
D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit
conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.

3.05 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.

B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.

3.16.4 16130 Boxes

183-199 6873
5-97
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pull and junction boxes.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16111 - Conduit

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable

Assemblies.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum).

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 and applicable local

requirements.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for purpose specified and shown.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations

unless dimensioned. Install at location required for splices,
taps, wire pulling connections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OUTLET BOXES

A. Electrical Sheet Metal Boxes: Sheet metal. Provide gasketed

cover by box manufacturer in all outdoor locations.

2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Surface-Mounted Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 45 with raised covers,

surface mounted junction box.
B. Material: Galvanized steel.
C. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless
steel cover screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for

splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance
with regulatory requirements.
B. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box with
threaded hubs that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both
184-199 6873
5-97
 supported within 12 inches of box.

3.16.4.1 16134 Panelboards

1.01 PROVISIONS

A. Requirements of the General Provisions apply to all work under

this section.
B. Throughout the specifications, types of materials may be specified
by manufacturer's name and catalog number in order to establish
standards of quality and performance and not for the purpose of
limiting competition. Alternate methods and/or materials may be
submitted to the Architect for consideration. Those judged to be
equal to that specified, will receive written approval.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Work covered by this Section includes furnishing of and paying for

all materials, labor, services, equipment, licenses, taxes, other
items, and appliances necessary for the execution, installation
and completion of all work specified herein and/or shown on the
drawings.
B. The work described in this section of the specifications includes
but is not limited to the following:

1. Panelboards of type and function as indicated on the

drawings and as specified hereinafter.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in

other sections of these specifications:

1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices and Hangers.

2. Section 16450 - Grounding.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data as required by Section 16010.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Panelboards shall be Siemens Sentron, Square D, or General

Electric. All panels shall be of the same manufacturer and shall
be of the same type wherever possible to provide breaker
interchangeability and reduce spare parts requirements.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. Provide panelboards of circuit breaker, dead-front safety type, UL

labeled, and meeting all applicable requirements of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association.
B. Provide panelboards with lugs (both main lugs and branch circuit
lugs) suitable and UL approved for both aluminum and copper
conductors.
C. Provide electrically isolated neutral bars.
D. Provide separate ground bars complete with lugs or connectors on
bar.
E. Provide panelboards with sequence phased bus bars or distributed
185-199 6873
5-97
 phase bussing for: 3-phase, 4-wire, 227/480 volts wye and 120/208
volts wye. Bussing shall be copper.
F. Provide panel doors equipped with chrome-plated locks and catches,
all keyed alike. Provide two keys for each lock. Provide fronts
with adjustable indicating trim clamps.
G. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers which are fully rated
and temperature rated for a 40 degrees C ambient. Breakers to be
quick-make, quick-break type with trip indication shown by handle
position other than ON or OFF and with a common trip on all multi-
pole breakers. Breakers shall be bolt on type.
H. Refer to drawings for numbers of branch circuits, their ratings,
number of poles, arrangements, etc. I. Provide hinged door in
front covers for flush mounted panelboards and a fully hinged
front cover for surface mounted panelboards.

2.03 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Lighting/miscellaneous power panelboards for 120/208 volts, 3-

phase, 4-wire service to be Siemens type S1 or equivalent with
circuit breakers rated 10,000 AIC.
B. Lighting panelboards for 277/480 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire service to
be Siemens type S2 with circuit breakers rated 14,000 AIC.
C. Power panelboards for 277/480 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire service to be
Siemens type S3. Provide circuit breakers in accordance with the
following table:

Min. Sym. Inter.

Frame Size Capacity at 480Volts

100 amp 14,000 amp

250 amp 25,000 amp
400 amp 30,000 amp
800 amp 30,000 amp

D. Provide circuit breakers of the interrupting rating required where

the available fault current exceeds the ratings shown in the table
above.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Ground separate ground bars to panel boxes and to the main service
entrance ground bus with a code-sized grounding conductor
installed in the same conduit as the phase and neutral conductors.
See Section 16450, Grounding.
B. Install all circuits using a common neutral in accordance with the
latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Balance all
circuits to achieve not greater than 10% unbalanced neutral
current in panel feeders.
C. Provide six circuit breaker handle lock-on devices for each
lighting and miscellaneous power panelboard for installation by
the contractor on circuits as directed by the Contracting Officer
to prevent unauthorized personnel from turning off circuits to
controls, unit heaters, clocks, night lights, etc. Turn spare
lock-on devices over to the Contracting Officer.
D. Provide typed directory cards under plastic on the inside face of
doors of lighting and branch panelboards. Directories to indicate
devices being served including space numbers or space names in
which devices or fixtures are located.

186-199 6873
5-97
3.16.5 16141 Wiring Devices

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches - Hubbell No. 1121.

B. Receptacles - Hubbell No 5262 specification grade.
C. Device plates and decorative box covers.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16130 - Boxes

1.04 REFERENCES

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing
dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products

specified in this Section with minimum five years experience.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for the purpose specified and
shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES

A. Leviton - equal to Hubbell

B. Bryant - equal to Hubbell
C. Hubbell 12211

2.02 WALL SWITCHES

A. Description: Commercial specification grade, rated at 20 amperes,

120-277 volts A.C., with ivory body and
toggle handle.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES

A. Leviton - equal to Hubbell

B. Hubbell 5262-I
187-199 6873
5-97
 C. Bryant - equal to Hubbell

2.04 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex receptacles: Specification grade, rated at 20 amperes, 125

volts A.C. With ivory body.
B. GFC I Receptacles: Specification grade, rated at 20 Amperes, 125
Volts A.C. With ivory body.

2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DEVICE PLATES AND DECORATIVE BOX COVERS

A. Leviton - equal to Hubbell

B. Hubbell - PB
C. Bryant - equal to Hubbell

2.6 DEVICE PLATES AND DECORATIVE BOX COVERS

A. Decorative cover plate: Bronze or Stainless Steel Plate

B. Weatherproof cover plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged
gasketed device cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered
by wall plates.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished

surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with
bonding jumper.
F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets
in finished areas.

3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes.

B. Install wall switches and wall phone outlets center of box 46"
above floor.
C. Install base outlets (power, phone, communication, etc.) With
center of box 18" above floor.
D. Install outlets above counters at 6" above counter top or 3" above
splash, which ever is greater, to center of box.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper
operation.
188-199 6873
5-97
 C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.16.6 16170 Grounding and Bonding

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Equipment grounding conductors.

B. Bonding.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 (NEC) - National Electrical Code.

1.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Comply with Article 250 of the latest NEC.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 and applicable local

requirements.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper.

B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements
and no smaller than 3/4" x 10' long.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory requirements.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate insulated
conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway.
Terminate each end on suitable lug bus or bushing.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections

for tightness and proper installation.

189-199 6873
5-97
3.16.7 16180 Equipment Wiring Systems

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections

or furnished by Owner.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner-furnished equipment.

B. Section 14210 - Electric Elevators.
C. Section 15170 - Motors
D. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping and Specialties.
D. Section 15855 - Air Handling Equipment.
F. Section 16111 - Conduit.
G. Section 16120 - Conductors.
H. Section 16130 - Boxes.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and

Cable Outlet.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring,

and energization.

2.02 PREPARATION

A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical

rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections.
Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and
installer.

2.03 INSTALLATION

A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures

encountered in heat-producing equipment.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use
liquidtight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations.
C. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment
plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with
suitable strain-relief clamps.
D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to
outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment
of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated.
F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and
control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as
indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated.

3.16.8 16190 Supporting Devices

190-199 6873
5-97
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit and equipment supports.

B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and
supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider
weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.

2.02 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS:

A. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors.

B. Concrete Surfaces: Use 'self-drilling anchors and expansion
anchors.
C. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle
bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
D. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
E. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
F. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and
conduit.
C. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or
cutting structural members
E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel.
Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat
appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock
washers under all nuts.
F. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of
four anchors.
G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand
cabinets and panelboards one inch (25 mm) off wall.
191-199 6873
5-97
 H. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets
and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

3.16.9 16195 Electrical Identification

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates and labels.

B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit markers.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. SECTION - PAINTING
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. SUBMIT UNDER SECTION 01300.

B. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE CATALOG DATA FOR NAMEPLATES, LABELS, AND
markers.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. FURNISH PRODUCTS LISTED AND CLASSIFIED BY TESTING FIRM acceptable
to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters

on black background.
B. Locations:

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.

2. Communication cabinets.

C. Letter Size:

1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and

loads.

D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on

black background. Use only for identification of individual wall
switches and receptacles, control device stations.

2.02 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Tape type wire markers.

B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes,
192-199 6873
5-97
 outlet and junction boxes and each load connection.
C. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number

indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire, number indicated on schematic
and interconnection diagrams on drawings.

2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS

A. Description
B. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 10 feet.
C. Spacing: 20 feet on centers.
D. Legend:

1. 480 Volt System

2. 208 Volt System
3. Fire Alarm System
4. Telephone System
5. Paging System

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surface to receive nameplates.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.

B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is
recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify conduit using field painting.

3.16.10 16440 Disconnect Switches

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Disconnect switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting

Types.
B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses).
D. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted. E. NEMA
KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings
for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit.

193-199 6873
5-97
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General Electric
B. Square D.
C. ITE
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break,

load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable
handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in
ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips:
Designed to accommodate Class RK-1 fuses.
B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; quick-make,
quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with
externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front
cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF
position.
C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; as indicated on Drawings.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FUSES

A. BUSS
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.04 FUSES

A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less ANSI/UL 198C, Class J; ANSI/UL 198E,
Class RKI;2 RK5; as indicated on Drawings; dual element, current
limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600 volt.
B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install disconnect switched where indicated on Drawings.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

3.16.11 16461 Dry Type Transformers

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Two winding transformers.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16111 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections.

B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding

194-199 6873
5-97
1.04 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.

B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment (International Electrical Testing
Association).
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of
enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and
impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations,
insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.

1.06 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data:

B. Record actual locations of transformers in project record
documents.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum 10 years experience.

1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. Suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store,

and protect products.
B. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide
an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units
from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and
finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS

A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product Options and

Substitutions.
B. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Model QL.

2. Hevi-Duty Model 3H
3. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Description: NEMA St 20, factory-assembled, air cooled dry type

transformers ratings as indicated.
D. Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase.
E. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phases.
195-199 6873
5-97
 F. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated
kVA as follows:

1. 1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise.

2. 16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 150 degrees C rise.

G. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient

at warmest point at full load.
H. Winding Taps:

1. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated

voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding.
2. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.

I. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible

flexible copper grounding strap.
J. Mounting:

1. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

K. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or

welded.
L. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 3R ventilated. Provide lifting eyes
or brackets.
M. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration- absorbing
mounts.
N. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload
capacity based on rated allowable temperature rise.

2.02 TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR NONLINEAR LOADS

A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product Options and

Substitutions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set transformer plumb and level.

B. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 16111, 2
feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make
conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads
suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building
structure.
D. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16170.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01440 - Quality Control: Field inspection, testing,

adjusting.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01650 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Adjusting

installed work.
B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap
adjustments.

3.16.12 16510 Lighting Fixtures

196-199 6873
5-97
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General an

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections
apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior lighting fixtures and accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High- Intensity

Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns.
B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each
luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730.

B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for purposes specified and shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings.

B. Install ballasts and specified accessories at factory.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for lighting fixtures.

B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps
specified.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B. Install suspended lighting fixtures and exit signs using pendants
supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to
suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C. Support lighting fixtures larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1 200 mm)
197-199 6873
5-97
 size independent of ceiling framing.
D. Install surface mounted lighting fixtures and exit signs plumb and
adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure
to prohibit movement.
E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted lighting fixtures
on grid ceiling directly from building structure; fasten surface
mounted lighting fixtures to ceiling T using bolts, screws,
rivets, or suitable clips.
F. Install recessed lighting fixtures using accessories and
firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire
rating.
G. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported lighting fixtures
in place.
H. Install wall mounted lighting fixtures and exit signs at height as
indicated on Drawings.
I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J. Install specified lamps in each luminaire, emergency lighting unit
and exit sign.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect

for proper connection and operation.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and adjust lighting fixtures as directed.

B. Adjust exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
C. Relamp lighting fixtures that have failed lamps at Substantial
Completion.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious

materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide demonstration of luminaire operation.

4.0 Warranty

All equipment furnished under this specification shall be guaranteed to

perform according to the manufacturer's published specifications.
Equipment shall be warranted to the Texas Department of Transportation
against defects and/or failure in design, materials and workmanship in
accordance with the manufacturer's standard warranty. Defective
equipment shall be repaired or replaced (within 24 hours) at the
manufacturer's representative option, during the warranty period at no
cost.

5.0 Testing Requirements

It is the policy of the Texas Department of Transportation to require

performance testing of all materials and equipment not previously tested
and approved. If technical data are not considered adequate for
approval, samples may be requested for time loss or delays caused by
testing prior to final State Department of Transportation approval of
198-199 6873
5-97
any items.

The equipment referenced to this specification shall be subject to

Factory Demonstration Tests at the equipment manufacturer's facility to
determine conformance with all the specifications requirements. The
Contractor shall arrange for and conduct the tests in accordance with
the specification requirements stated herein.

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for

satisfying all inspection requirements prior to submission for the Texas
Department of Transportation's inspection and acceptance.

The results of each test shall be compared with the requirements

specified herein. Failure to conform to the requirements of any test
shall be counted as a defect, and equipment shall be subject to
rejection by the Texas Department of Transportation. Rejected equipment
may be offered for retest provided all non-compliances have been
corrected and retested by the Contractor and evidence thereof submitted
to the Engineer.

6.0 Experience Requirements

Contractor or subcontractor involved in the construction of the "Traffic

Management Center and Maintenance Support Building" shall meet the
following requirements:

Three (3) years experience in the construction of comparable buildings as

described within these specifications.

Two(2) comparable buildings, as described within these specifications,

which has been in continuously satisfactory operation for at least to
(2) years. The contractor shall submit as proof, photographs or other
supporting documents, and the names, address and telephone numbers of
the operating personnel who can be contacted regarding the system.

7.0 Measurement

The complete "Traffic Management Center and Maintenance Support Building"

and constructed as indicated on the plans and as prescribed herein when
completely installed will be measured as a lump sum unit.

8.0 Payment

The work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item,

measured as provided under "measurement " will be paid for at the lump
sum price bid for "Traffic Management Center and Maintenance Support
Building", which price shall be full compensation for preparation,
furnishing, and installing all materials and equipment, including
outdoor lighting, utilities, etc., and for all other materials, labor,
tools, equipment accessories and incidentals necessary to provide a
"Traffic Management Center and Maintenance Support Building" complete in
place and ready for installation of all equipment and furnishings as
shown within the plans and as directed by the Engineer.

199-199 6873
5-97